Skip to main content

Full text of "The gospel of the hereafter"

See other formats


ilMmlmi' •  '  ImllillH 

E  HEREAFTER 


•'ii' 

i  ! 


1  PATERSON-SMWH 


BIBLM 


.  TTRKELL  &  Co. 


The  Gospel  of  the  Hereafter 


The      ! 
Gospel  of  the  Hereafter 


By 
J.  PATERSON-SMYTH,  B.  D.,  LL.  D.,  LITT.  D.,  D.  C.  L. 

Rector  of  St.  Georges,  Montreal,  Late  Professor 

of  Pastoral   Theology,    University  of  Dublin 

Author  of  «  How   We  Got  Our  Bible,"  «  The  <?'  y 

Old  Documents  and  the  New  Bible,"  etc.,  etc.t  etc.  &      \ 


msvrr 
BIBL  MAI 

SEMINARY 


NEW  YORK          CHICAGO          TORONTO 

Fleming      H.      Revell      Company 

LONDON  AND  EDINBURGH 


4819? 


Copyright,  1910,  by 
FLEMING  H.    REVELL  COMPANY 


Other  Works  by  Same  Author 


How  We  Got  Our  Bible.    (Illustrated. ) 
2Oth  edition  (125,000)  cloth. 

How  God  Inspired  the  Bible. 
I2th  thousand,  cloth. 

^e  Old  Documents  and  the  New  Bible. 
$th  edition,  II  illustrations,  cloth. 

The  Divine  Library. 
lOth  thousand,  cloth. 

The  Bible  for  the  Young.     {A  series  for  home 
teaching.)      Cloth. 

The  Preacher  and  his  Sermon.      Cloth. 
Social  Service  Ideals.     2nd  edition. 

The  Church  :     Its  Divisions  and  Prospects  of 
Reunion. 


New  York:  158  Fifth  Avenue 
Chicago:  123  North  Wabash  Ave. 
Toronto:  25  Richmond  Street,  W. 
London:  21  Paternoster  Square 
Edinburgh:  100  Princes  Street 


To  My  Wife 


Contents 

PART  I 
THE  NEAR  HEREAFTER 

I.  "I" i        .11 

II.  THE  THREE  STAGES  OF  EXISTENCE    .         .       30 

III.  WHAT  THE  BIBLE  SAYS  ABOUT  THE  NEAR 

HEREAFTER 41 

IV.  WHAT  THE  BIBLE  AND  THE  CHURCH  SAY 

ABOUT  THE  NEAR  HEREAFTER      .          .        55 

V.  THE  CRISIS  OF  DEATH    ....       70 

VI.  "  I  "  "  MYSELF  "  AFTER  DEATH      .         .       80 

VII.  RECOGNITION 98 

VIII.  THE  COMMUNION  OF  SAINTS     .         .         .no 

IX.  GROWTH  AND  PURIFICATION     .         .         .127 

X.  PROBATION  IN  THIS  LIFE  .         .         .136 

XI.  MINISTRY  IN  THE  UNSEEN  LIFE         .         .149 

XII.  CONCLUSION 157 


PART  II 
THE  FAR  HEREAFTER 

I.  THE  JUDGMENT 163 

II.  HELL .164 

III.  HEAVEN 199 


PARTI 
The  Near  Hereafter 


CORRI^ 
'SV,  PROF,  DAVID  SMITH,  D,D. 

"ASLEEP  IN  JESUS" 

3Ln  Anxious  Inquirer.—"'!  was  talk- 
Minstian  friend  who  believes 
we  leave  this  world,   thf 
1f  as  the  body,  ar  ' 


T 


CHAPTER  I 


r  •  ^iiE  title  of  this  chapter  is  a  very  short 
one.  It  consists  of  but  a  single  word, 
and  that  the  shortest  word  in  the 
whole  English  language.  And  though  it  is  the 
shortest  word,  yet  it  is  the  most  wonderful  and  t 
mysterious  word.  Though  it  is  a  word  that 
every  one  of  us  has  on  his  lips  every  moment 
of  the  day,  yet  no  one  who  reads  this  book — 
no  one  in  the  whole  world — has  ever  been  able 
to  understand  what  it  means. 

Just  the  letter  "  I." — All  day  long,  from 
morning  till  night,  we  are  using  it : — I  did  this. 
I  mean  to  do  that.  I  ought.  I  shall.  I  will. 
I  think.  I  wish.  I  love.  I  hate.  I  remem 
ber.  I  forget.  And  so  on  and  on — ever  ring 
ing  the  changes  on  this  little  word  in  all  its 
cases  "  I  "  and  "  my  "  and  "  mine  "  and  "  me." 
I  want  to  set  you  thinking.  Who  or  what  is 
this  "  I,"  this  "  me  "  ? 

Perhaps   you  will  say,  "  Oh,  there  is  noth- 
11 


12  The  Near  Hereafter 

ing  mysterious  about  it  —  I  know  very  well 
what  I  mean  by  it.      I 


But  what  do  I  mean  by  Myself  ?  Of  course 
there  is  a  rough  work-day  meaning  in  which  it 
means  my  whole  being  as  I  stand  —  clothes, 
body,  brains,  thoughts,  feelings,  general  appear 
ance,  everything.  But  every  thinking  man 
knows  that  this  is  not  the  real  "  I,"  that  when 
he  says  I  can,  I  do,  I  will,  I  ought,  I  remem 
ber,  the  "I"  means  to  him  something  much 
deeper  and  more  mysterious  than  that.  Ask 
yourself,  each  one,  what  do  you  mean  by  "  I  "  ? 

§1 

Is  IT  MY  BODY  ?  Nay,  surely  not.  I  know 
that  my  body  is  only  my  outward  garment 
woven  by  "me"  out  of  certain  chemical  sub 
stances.  In  a  scientific  museum  I  can  stand 
before  a  glass  case  and  see  neatly  labelled  the 
exact  portions  of  lime  and  silica  and  iron  and 
water  and  other  elements  which  compose  my 
body.  I  know  that  this  body  is  continually  r\ 
changing  its  substance  like  the  rainbow  in  the 
sky,  like  the  eddy  round  a  stone  in  the  river.  / 
The  body  I  have  to-day  is  no  more  the  body 
of  last  year  than  the  fire  on  my  hearth  to-night 


"  I "  13 

is  the  fire  that  was  there  this  morning.  I  have 
had  a  dozen  different  bodies  since  I  was  born, 
but  I  am  the  same  still.  Every  thinking  man 
knows  that  the  "  I,"  the  real  self,  stands  behind 
the  body  looking  out  through  the  windows  of 
the  eyes,  receiving  messages  through  the  portals 
of  the  ears.  It  rules  the  body,  it  possesses  the 
body.  It  says,  "  I  have  a  body."  "  This  body 
is  a  thing  belonging  to  me." 

As  you  watch  the  changing  expression  in  the 
face  of  your  friend,  as  you  see  his  eyes  flashing 
in  anger,  or  softening  in  affectionate  sympathy, 
do  you  not  feel  that  all  you  see  is  but  the  out 
ward  casing,  that  the  real  self  of  your  friend  is 
a  something  dwelling  within  ? 

I  hope  I  am  not  puzzling  you.  What  I  want 
to  do  is  to  introduce  you  to  your  own  self,  to 
make  you  really  acquainted  with  that  mys 
terious  being  in  his  first  stage  of  existence  here 
and  then  to  follow  him  out  into  the  great  ad 
venture  of  the  Hereafter. 

§2 

Let  us  go  on.  What  is  this  I,  this  self  ?  Is 
IT^MY_BRAIX  ?  Physiologists  tell  us  wonder 
ful  things  of  that  brain ;  how  its  size  and  shape, 


14  The  Near  Hereafter 

and  the  amount  of  gray  matter  modify  my 
character ;  how  it  excites  itself  when  I  am 
thinking ;  how  it  has  different  departments  for 
different  functions ;  how  it  rules  and  directs 
everything  I  do.  And  men  impressed  by  these 
wonders  have  sometimes  asserted  that  there  is 
nothing  more  to  be  found.  It  is  the  brain  which 
originates  all,  thought  is  only  certain  activities 
of  the  brain — memory  is  only  impressions  on 
the  substance  of  the  brain — when  the  brain  de 
cays  there  is  no  self  remaining.  What  I  call 
"  I "  is  merely  a  function  of  my  brain. 

But  immediately  the  question  arises,  Which 
brain  ?  The  particles  of  my  brain  are  always 
changing.  I  have  had  a  dozen  different  brains 
in  my  lifetime,  with  not  a  particle  remaining ) 
the  same.  Which  of  these  brains  is  it  that  "  I " 
am  only  a  function  of  ?  And  how  does  it  happen 
that  I  remember  what  I  thought  and  did  and  said 
with  the  old  vanished  brains  of  twenty  and  thirty 
years  ago  ?  Memory  insists  that  I  am  still  the 
same  "  I "  in  spite  of  all  those  changes  of  brain. 
If  memory  be  but  a  series  of  impressions  regis 
tered  on  the  brain  these  could  no  more  survive 
the  dissolution  of  the  brain  than  impressions  on 
wax  could  survive  the  melting  of  the  wax. 


"  I "  15 

Surely  my  memory,  my  irresistible  conviction 
of  personal  identity  with  my  past  makes  it 
abundantly  clear  that  "  I "  am  a  mysterious  un 
changing  spiritual  being  behind  this  ever 
changing  brain. 

And  that  is  what  the  best  modern  science  as 
serts — that  the  brain  is  but  my  instrument.  If 
we  compare  it  to  a  violin  then  "  I  "  am  the  un 
seen  violin  player  behind  it.  The  musician  can 
not  produce  violin  music  without  a  violin,  but 
also  the  violin  cannot  produce  a  musical  note, 
much  less  take  part  in  a  complex  symphony 
without  the  musician  behind  it.  If  the  strings 
of  the  violin  be  injured,  or  if  they  be  smeared 
with  grease,  the  result  is  discords  and  crazy 
sounds.  If  the  brain  be  physically  injured  or 
disordered  the  result  is  what  we  call  mental 
derangement. 

To  say,  then,  that  the  brain  is  the  seat  of 
thought  is  not  at  all  to  say  that  it  is  the  source 
of  thought.     Everything  involved  in  my  con 
scious  personality  is  related  to  the  brain,  but  it 
is  not  originated  by  the  brain.     The  mysterious N, 
spiritual  "  I "  is  behind  the  brain,  using  the  brainy 
— nay  further — actually  educating  and  fitting 
the  brain  for  its  work.     The  brain  of  a  little 


16  The  Near  Hereafter 

child  with  its  plastic  gray  matter  is  smooth  and 
unformed.  It  is  the  "  I "  behind  that  is  steadily- 
creasing  and  moulding  and  training  it  for  its 
purpose.  I  don't  know  of  anything  more  im 
pressive  than  the  study  of  the  human  brain  in 
its  activities,  and  how  "I"  am  continually 
changing  and  modifying  and  educating  my 
brain.  You  feel  sometimes  as  if  you  could  al 
most  lay  hands  on  that  mysterious  spiritual 
being  that  is  behind  it,  like  a  spider  in  his  web 
— feeling  and  interpreting  every  quiver  of  it, 
sending  messages  out  into  the  world  by  means 
of  it.  But  he  always  eludes  you.  You  have 
no  instrument  that  can  touch  Trim.  You  only 
know  that  he  is  there,  enshrouded  in  mystery, 
a  supernatural  being  not  only  using  the  brain 
but  educating  it  for  use.  The  brain  itself  has 
no  knowledge  or  thought,  and  no  power  of  itself 
to  originate  knowledge  or  thought.  The  brain 
of  a  baboon  differs  very  little  from  the  brain  of 
a  man.  The  difference  is  in  the  being  who  is  > 
(  behind  it.  I  read  lately  the  statement  of  a 
great  scientist :  "  As  far  as  I  can  see,  if  the  soul 
of  a  man  could  get  behind  the  brain  of  an  ape 
he  could  probably  use  it  almost  as  well  as  his  / 


"I"  17 

I  have  never  known  a  really  thoughtful  stu 
dent  of  science  satisfied  with  the  foolish  argu 
ment  that  the  brain  is  what  thinks  and  remem 
bers  and  wills.  He  looks  upon  a  human  brain, 
on  the  dissecting  table,  a  mere  mass  of  cells  and 
nerve  centres  suffused  with  blood,  and  he  thinks 
of  the  glorious  poems  and  the  mighty  intellec 
tual  efforts  and  the  noble  thoughts  of  God  and 
Eighteousness,  and  perforce  he  laughs  at  the 
thought  that  that  poor  bleeding  thing  originated 
them.  Something  within  him  indignantly  re 
plies  :  "  Nay,  '  I '  am  not  the  brain.  I  possess 
it.  I  use  it.  It  is  mine,  but  it  is  not  me ! " 

§3 

We  have  not  yet  gone  deep  enough  to  dis 
cover  this  "  I."  It  is  hardly  necessary  to  ask 
the  next  question  which  some  foolish  people  are 
speculating  about  to-day.  Am  I  merely  the 

TRAIN     OF     THOUGHTS     AND     FEELINGS    AND 

EMOTIONS  ?  Am  "  I "  but  like  an  Eolian  harp^ 
played  on  by  the  wind  of  sensations  from  with-  ( 
out? 

Surely  not.  This  mysterious  "I"  is  con 
stantly  and  persistently  claiming  to  be  a  real 
conscious  person  behind  all  these — greater  than 


l8  The  Near  Hereafter 

all  these — possessing  all  these.  Listen  to  the 
voice  down  deep  in  your  consciousness — COGITO, 
ERGO  SUM.  "  I "  think — therefore  "  I "  exist. 
I  am  not  the  thoughts  and  feelings  and  emo 
tions — I  am  greater  than  them  all.  I  am  the 
possessor  of  them  all.  They  are  mine.  They 
are  not  Me.  They  are  only  passing  phases  of 
my  being.  They  are  always  changing.  Every 
thing  around  is  changing.  I  remain  the  same 
being  always.  Nothing  else  in  the  universe  re 
mains  the  same  being — except  God.  God^andJ. 
God  and  these  selves  that  are  in  every  one  of  us. 

I  cannot  escape  that  conviction  that  "  I "  am 
the  permanent  being  behind  all  the  changes. 
No  human  vision  can  see  me.  No  surgeon's 
knife  can  detect  me.  But  I  am  there,  behind 
everything. 

The  particles  of  my  body,  of  brain  and  nerves 
and  heart  are  constantly  being  changed — every 
few  years  they  are  completely  renewed.  I  have 
had  a  dozen  new  bodies,  a  dozen  new  sets  of 
brains  and  heart  since  I  was  born — I  am  always 
wearing  them  out.  I  change  them  when  they 
are  worn  out  and  throw  them  aside  like  old 
clothes.  My  thoughts  and  feelings  are  ever 
changing,  like  the  ripples  on  the  sea. 


"  I "  19 

But  I  am  absolutely  certain  that  "  I "  am  still 
there — that  I  am  the  same — just  as  God  is  the 
same.  The  same  "  I "  that  played  as  a  little 
child — the  same  "  I "  that  lived  and  desired  and 
thought  and  felt  and  worked  and  sinned  years 
and  years  ago. 

Not  a  particle  remains  of  the  brain,  or  nerves, 
or  tongue,  or  eyes,  or  hands,  or  feet,  with  which 
I  did  a  good  or  evil  deed  twenty  years  since — 
but  it  is  impossible  for  me  to  doubt  that  it  was 
"  I "  who  did  it,  that  I  to-day  deserve  the  praise 
or  blame  which  is  due  to  it. 

Every  man  on  earth,  when  he  thinks  about 
it,  has  this  conviction  of  himself  as  an  "  I " — as  a 
person  separate  from  all  other  persons,  as  a 
self  separate  from  all  other  selves,  as  remaining 
always  the  same  being,  whatever  changes  may 
take  place  around  him.  That  is  what  consti 
tutes  man — a  self  conscious  of  itself.  As  far  as 
we  can  discover,  the  lower  animals  have  no  such 
idea.  Children,  at  first,  have  not.  Did  you 
ever  notice  how  a  little  child  never  says  "  I " 
till  he  is  about  three  years  old  ?  He  always 
speaks  in  the  third  person.  It  is  always  "  Baby 
does  this,"  "  Baby  likes  that,"  until  the  Divine 
revelation  of  his  personality  gradually  grows 


2O  The  Near  Hereafter 

and  he  recognizes  himself  as  a  person.  Then, 
without  any  teaching  on  your  part,  the  child,  of 
his  own  accord,  will  begin  to  say  "  I." 


Oh,  who  or  what  is  this  awful,  mysterious 
"  I  "  that  dwells  somewhere  in  the  centre  of  my 
being,  and  rules  and  possesses  and  is  responsible 
for  everything  ?  What  is  this  self,  in  each  of 
you,  that  is  hidden  behind  your  faces  as  behind 
a  mask  —  that  is  looking  out  through  your  eyes, 
and  receiving,  through  your  ears,  the  thoughts 
that  others  are  trying  to  express  for  you  ?  Can 
the  surgeon's  knife  find  any  trace  of  it  ?  Is  it 
possible  to  destroy  it?  Is  it  possible  to  get 
away  from  it  ?  It  has  survived  the  putting 
away  of  every  part  of  the  body  a  dozen  times 
over.  Will  it  survive  the  final  putting  away  of 
the  whole  body  at  death?  Will  it  survive 
everything  ?  Shall  "  I  "  be  "  I,"  the  same  iden 
tical  person  through  all  the  ages  of  eternity  ? 

§5 

Look  in  again  upon  this  "  I  "  within  you  and 
answer  this  question.  Why  does  it  assert  so 
positively  that  it  is  impossible  to  doubt  it  :  u  I 


"I"  21 

ought  to  do  certain  things,  I  ought  not  to  do""j 
certain  other  things  "  ?    All  over  the  earth  this  / 
day — from  the  St.  Lawrence  to  the  Ganges, ) 
from  the  North  Pole  to  the  South — there  is  no 
man  outside  of  a  lunatic  asylum  without  that 
conviction.     No  race,  not  even  the  lowest,  has 
been  found  without  it.     Where  did  that  convic 
tion  come  from  ?     From  the  Bible,  do  you  say  ? 
From   the  teachings  of  Christ?    Nay,  surely 
not.     Long  before  the  Bible,  long  before  the 
incarnation  of  Christ,  the  old   pagan  had  the 
thought  clear  and  distinct,  though  not  by  any 
means  so  clear  and  distinct  as  Christianity  has 
made  it.     Did  you  ever  think  of  the  mystery  of 
this  authoritative  utterance  of  the  self  within 
you :  "  I  ought "  f     In  the  very  lowest  savages  it 
asserts  this.    St.  Paul  calls  this  sense  of  "  ought " 
— the  law  of  God  written  in  our  hearts  (Eom. 
ii.  15).     St.  John  calls  it  the  light  of  Christ  uOj 
us,  "  the  light  which  lighteth  every  man  com- / 
ing  into  the  world  "  (St.  John  i.  9).     Longfel 
low  sings  of  it  in  "  Hiawatha  " : 

That  in  even  savage  bosoms 
There  are  longings,  yearnings,  strivings 
For  the  good  they  comprehend  not ; 
That  the  feeble  hands  and  helpless, 


22  The  Near  Hereafter 

Groping  blindly  in  the  darkness, 
Touch  God's  right  hand  in  the  darkness. 

Even  in  the  heart  of  the  thief  or  the  murderer 
it  insists  :  I  ought  to  do  this,  I  ought  not  to  do 
that,  and  when  he  disobeys  this  mysterious  law 
within  him  he  is  compelled  to  drag  himself  up 
for  judgment  and  fierce  remorse  for  wrong  that 
no  one  else  knows  of,  that  no  one  else  can  pun 
ish  him  for.  What  do  you  think  of  that  mys 
terious  fact  about  this  Conscious  Personality 
within  you  ?  Does  it  not  look  as  if  it  belongs 
to  God,  that  every  soul  is  stamped  with  God's 
image  and  superscription,  as  every  coin  of  King 
George  is  stamped  in  the  mint  with  the  image 
and  superscription  of  the  King  ? 


And  this  suggests  a  further  question.  Why 
is  there  in  us  this  sense  of  imperfection,  of  in 
completeness  —  of  ideals  always  away  in  the 
front  that  we  can  never  even  approximately 
reach  on  earth  ?  Look  at  this  conscience  which 
we  have  just  been  thinking  about.  It  is  always 
holding  high  above  us  an  ideal  of  perfect 
goodness  and  insisting  that  we  must  strive 
after  it.  But  we  can  never  get  even  near  it  on 


"  I "  23 

earth.  The  very  best  man  at  the  close  of  life  ] 
sees  his  ideal  still  high  above  him  and  feels  how 
much  better  he  might  be  and  ought  to  be  and 
then  he  dies  feeling  the  incompleteness  of  this 
life.  Does  not  this  unfinished  life  thus  broken 
off,  with  its  aim  still  far  in  the  future,  demand 
something  further  ?  The  great  German  philos 
opher  Kant  founded  on  this  fact  his  famous  ar 
gument  for  Immortality. 

Or  look  at  our  efforts  after  knowledge.  It 
takes  nearly  all  this  life  to  fit  the  student  for 
his  search  after  truth,  and  when  he  is  just  ready 
and  the  great  ocean  of  truth  lies  before  him, 
Death  comes.  Oh,  how  incomplete  and  unfin 
ished  his  life  seems !  Just  the  scaffolding  put 
up  for  his  work,  just  the  tools  got  into  good 
order.  Then  he  dies. 

"For  half  a  century,"  said  Victor  Hugo,  "I 
have  been  writing  my  thoughts  in  prose  and 
verse,  history,  philosophy,  drama,  romance,  tra 
dition,  satire,  ode,  song.  But  I  feel  that  I  have 
not  said  a  thousandth  part  of  what  is  in  me./ 
When  I  go  down  to  the  grave  I  shall  have  fin 
ished  my  day's  work."  And  this  thought  of  in 
completeness  compels  in  him  the  hope,  "  another 
day  will  begin  next  morning." 


24  The  Near  Hereafter 

Was  Victor  Hugo  right  ?  Was  the  old  pagan 
philosopher  right  ?  "  You  may  catch  my  body," 
said  Socrates,  "  but  no  man  can  catch  me,  my 
self,  to  bury  me."  Victor  Hugo  did  not  believe 
in  the  Christian  Bible.  Socrates  had  no  revela 
tion  from  God,  except  the  revelation  of  this  self 
within  him.  You  have  the  revelation  of  Christ 
as  well.  What  do  you  think  of  the  question  ? 
When  the  dust  shall  return  to  the  earth  as  it 
was,  shall  the  spirit  return  to  God  who  gave  it  ? 
When  brain  and  heart  and  nerves  are  destroyed, 
when  the  sun  is  old  and  the  stars  grow  cold, 
and  all  that  you  ever  saw  is  swept  away  into 
nothingness,  will  this  mysterious,  lonely  self 
remain,  to  say  "  I "  and  "  my  "  and  "  mine  " 
and  "  me,"  through  all  the  ages  of  Eternity  ? 

§7 

No w,  I  put  a  closer  question  still.  Is  not  this 
mysterious  "  I "  behind  the  brain  the  being  that 
God  is  especially  concerned  with  ?  What  He 
sometimes  calls  your  soul.1  The  ceiling  of  the 
Sistine  chapel  at  Rome  has  a  fine  paint 
ing  by  Michael  Angelo  from  the  text,  "Man 

1  In  a  simple,  popular  statement  such  as  this  it  would  but  be 
confusing  to  go  into  nice  metaphysical  distinctions  of  soul 
and  "  spirit."  r 


"  I "  25 

became  a  living  soul."  It  represents  the  Su 
preme  Spirit  floating  in  the  ether  and  touching 
with  His  finger  the  body  of  Adam.  As  He 
touches  it  an  electric  spark  flashes  into  the  body 
and  Adam  becomes  a  living  soul.  Is  not  this 
the  centre  of  the  awful  mystery  that  I  call  "  I," 
myself — the  same  of  which  our  Lord  asks  His 
tremendous  question :  "  What  shall  it  profit  a 
man  if  he  gain  the  whole  world  and  lose  his  own 
self?" 

Is  not  this  "  self  "  the  real  man,  the  man  in 
the  centre  of  his  life,  in  the  deepest  recesses  of 
his  being,  the  man  as  he  lives  beneath  the  eye 
of  God  and  enters  into  relations  with  God — the 
man  for  whom  the  Bible  announces  that  exciting 
adventure  in  the  long  ages  of  the  Hereafter  ? 

Is  not  this  "  I "  looking  out  from  behind  your 
eyes  this  moment — the  real  man,  of  whom  the 
body  that  you  see  is  only  the  outward  covering, 
of  whom  the  brain  is  only  the  outward  tele 
graphic  instrument  ?  Should  not  we  adapt  our 
thoughts  to  that  tremendous  fact  ?  Instead  of 
thinking  "  I  have  a  soul,"  should  we  not  rather 
think  "  I  am  a  soul "  ?  Instead  of  thinking, 
that  beautiful  girl  has  an  ugly  soul,  that  insig 
nificant  looking  man  has  a  noble  soul,  should 


26  The  Near  Hereafter 

we  not  rather  think,  that  ugly  soul  has  a  beau- 
if ul  girl  body,  that  splendid  soul  is  in  a  mean 
looking  body  ?  Would  not  some  such  manner 
of  thinking  help  to  bring  home  the  reality,  that 
"I"  am  the  invisible  immortal  being  which 
clothes  itself  in  a  material  body  during  this  first 
stage  of  its  life.  Should  not  we  be  more  likely 
to  become  acquainted  with  our  own  soul,  to  be 
come  impressed  with  its  existence,  to  think 
about  its  character  ?  Should  we  not  thus  learn 
more  easily  that  wealth  and  clothes  and  out 
ward  appearance  are  not  so  important,  that  the 
character,  the  relation  to  God  is  the  one  su 
preme  thing  ? 

Think  out  for  yourself  the  answer  to  that  and 
to  all  these  questions.  I  am  not  going  to  an 
swer  any  of  them.  My  purpose  here  is  not 
to  answer  questions  but  to  set  you  asking 
them — not  to  do  your  thinking  for  you,  but  to 
set  you  thinking  for  yourselves.  Is  it  the  spoil 
ing  and  ruining  of  that  self  within  you  which 
Christ  balances  against  the  whole  world  ? 

§8 

Now,  have  I  helped,  even  in  a  little  way,  to 
introduce  you  to  yourself — that  "  self  "  that  is 


"  I "  27 

going  out  into  the  great  adventure  of  the  Here-  <* 
after?  If  I  have,  I  have  done  a  very  good 
thing  for  you.  With  so  many  the  soul  is  but  a 
vague  abstraction,  belonging  to  the  pulpit  and 
the  sick-bed  and  the  life  of  the  hereafter.  But 
amid  the  busy  daily  life,  the  real  work  and 
pleasure,  the  real  streets  and  houses,  it  is  hard, 
to  think  of  it  except  as  something  shadowy  and 
unreal.  My  effort  here  is  to  take  it  out  of  the 
region  of  the  vague  and  unreal  and  bring  it  into 
the  region  of  every-day,  practical  life. 

Try  to  respond  to  my  thoughts.  Try  to  get 
acquainted  with  your  own  self — your  own  soul. 
Try  to  watch  its  wondrous  life.  Try  to  become 
impressed  with  its  existence — to  think  about  its 
character.  Think  whether,  when  the  Bible  says 
anything  about  your  soul,  it  means  this  mys 
terious  being  that  you  call  "I."  Think  whether 
this  "  I "  is  an  emanation  from  God's  nature, 
and  therefore  is  intended  to  be  in  harmony  with 
Him.  Think  whether  it  must  live  for  ever  and 
ever,  and  therefore  if  its  character  be  not  of 
enormous  importance — if  its  character-making 
be  not  the  one  supremely  important  thing  in 
your  life. 

Then  realize  that  whether  you  exalt  or  de- 


28  The  Near  Hereafter 

grade  it,  it  is  with  you  for  ever.     You  CAN 

NEVER,  NEVER,  NEVER  GET  AWAY  FROM  YOUR 
SELF.  You  will  be  the  very  same  self  after 
death  as  before.  I  read  some  time  since  of  the 
sinking  of  a  ship  and  how  the  captain  dived 
through  the  cabin  door,  and  keeping  the  light 
above  in  view,  swam  up  through  the  hatchway 
and  escaped  out  of  the  wreck.  There  is  a  de 
ceitful  expectation  in  human  nature  that  when 
we  go  down  in  the  sea  of  death  and  eternity  we 
shall  in  some  way  escape  out  of  ourselves,  swim 
away  from  our  own  personalities,  and  thus  leave 
the  ship  at  the  bottom  of  the  sea.  If  the  "  I " 
meant  only  the  body,  that  would  be  true.  But 
this  "  I  "  is  where  character  exists,  where  love 
and  desire  and  will  exist.  This  "I"  is  the 
captain  himself.  The  captain  cannot  swim 
away  from  the  captain.  Myself  cannot  swim 
away  from  "  myself."  "  I "  must  be  "  I "  to  aU 
eternity.  I  cannot  shake  off  my  character,  be 
it  good  or  bad. 

Realize  next  what  you  mean  to  the  God  who 
created  you  and  lovingly  planned  for  you  your 
magnificent  destiny. 

Let  the  soul  within  you  feel  its  dignity,  its 
priceless  importance  in  the  eyes  of  its  Maker. 


"  I "  29 

Measure  the  value  of  it  by  what  God  has  done 
for  it. 

Why  was  this  world  slowly  built  through 
thousands  of  ages  ?  Just  as  a  platform  for  this 
"I"  to  develop  character.  Why  was  the  In 
carnation  and  Death  of  the  Everlasting  Son  of 
God  ?  Why  is  the  gift  and  energy  of  the  Holy 
Spirit  ?  Why  is  the  perpetual  intercession  of 
Christ  in  Heaven?  Why  is  the  grace  and 
power  of  the  Sacraments  in  life  ?  Why  are  the 
boundless  prospects  opened  beyond  the  grave  ? 

All  for  the  sake  of  this  mysterious  perma 
nent  supernatural  being  that  we  call  "I." 
Measure  I  say  by  what  God  has  done  for  it,  the 
tremendous  value  He  sets  on  your  immortal 
soul. 


CHAPTER  II 
THE  THEEE  STAGES  OF  EXISTENCE 

§1 

NOW,  grip  with  both  hands  the  fact  that 
this  life,  as  you  know  it,  is  but  the 
first  stage  in  God's  plan  for  you — 
the  kindergarten  stage,  the  caterpillar  stage  of 
your  existence.  That  in  five  thousand  years 
that  spiritual  being  looking  out  from  behind 
the  mask  of  your  face  to-day  will  be  living 
still,  and  feeling  still,  and  thinking  still.  That 
what  you  call  death,  the  end  of  this  career,  is 
but  birth  into  a  new  and  more  exciting  career,  J 
stretching  away  into  the  far  future,  age  after 
age,  aeon  after  aaon,  whose  prospect  should  stir 
the  very  blood  within  us. 

There  is  nothing  which  so  touches  some  of  us 
as  a  thing  with  "makings"  in  it,  a  thing  with 
untold  potentialities  in  it,  a  thing  which  may 
come  in  the  future  to  God  only  knows  what. 
Talk  of  the  caterpillar  which  is  to  develop  into 
the  butterfly  or  the  acorn  which  shall  one  day  '.  '•• 
30 


The  Three  Stages  of  Existence       31 

be  a  mighty  oak.  Why,  these  miracles  are  but 
child's  play  compared  with  the  miracles  poten 
tially  wrapped  up  in  this  poor  little  self.  No 
wildest  fairy  tale  can  suggest  the  wonder  of  its 
possibilities  as  it  passes  out  into  the  new  adven 
ture  of  the  life  beyond. 


Thirteen  hundred  years  ago  there  was  an 
eager  discussion  in  the  court  of  King  Edward 
of  Northumbria.  The  old  wattled  hall  was 
blazing  with  torches  and  a  crowd  of  eager  lis 
teners  hung  intent  on  the  teaching  of  the  Chris 
tian  missionaries  who  had  just  arrived.  At  last 
a  grim  bearded  old  earl  rose  in  his  place.  "  Can 
this  new  religion,"  he  asked,  "  tell  us  of  what 
happens  after  death  ?  The  life  of  man  is  like  a 
swallow  flying  through  this  lighted  hall.  It 
enters  in  at  one  door  from  the  darkness  outside, 
and  flitting  through  the  light  and  warmth 
passes  through  the  farther  door  into  the  dark 
unknown  beyond,  Can  this  new  religion  solve 
for  us  the  mystery  ?  "What  comes  to  men  in 
the  dark,  dim  unknown  ?  " 

Perhaps  he  was  thinking  of  his  dead  wife  or 
his  brave  boy  killed  in  battle.  The  old  earl's 


32  The  Near  Hereafter 

question  is  the  question  of  humanity  in  all  ages 
gazing  out  into  the  darkness  after  its  dead. 
The  full  answer  can  only  be  had  by  dying. 
But  a  partial  answer  can  be  had  now. 

The  Bible  reveals  to  us  that  there  are  three 
stages  of  human  existence : 

1st.  The  earthly  stage,  where  "  I,"  the  mys 
terious  "I,"  live  with  a  body  woven  around  me. 
The  Bible  hints  that  this  stage  is  of  untold  im 
portance.  In  fact,  all  the  future  stages  depend 
largely  on  how  it  is  lived.  That  is  what  makes 
this  first  stage  so  awfully  important.  It  is  the 
formative  time  whose  influence  spreads  out  into 
eternity.  In  this  stage  Acts  make  habits. 
Habits  make  character.  Character  makes  Des 
tiny. 

2nd.  The  intermediate  life  BEFORE  THE  JUDG 
MENT,  THE  "NEAR  HEREAFTER "  WHEN  "I" 

LAY  ASIDE  THE  BODY  AT  DEATH.  THIS  IS  THE 
STAGE  BEFORE  THE  EESURRECTION  WHICH  IN 

OUR  LORD'S  TIME  THE  JEWS  CALLED  HADES, 
AND  IN  WHICH  THEY  CALLED  THE  SPECIAL 
STATE  OF  THE  BLEST  PARADISE,  ABRAM7S  BOSOM, 
UNDER  THE  THRONE,  ETC. 

3rd.  And  away  after  this  the  final  stage  the 
"  Far  Hereafter  "  in  the  "end  of  the  age,"  as 


The  Three  Stages  of  Existence       33 

our  Lord  says,  where  come  the  General  Resur- 
rection,  the  Judgment  of  Men,  the  final  stages 
of  Heaven  and  Hell.  That  stage  has  not  yet 
arrived  in  the  history  of  humanity. 

§3 

In  Part  I  of  this  book  we  are  only  concerned 
with  the  Intermediate  Life,  the  life  of  the  near 
Hereafter  which  comes  after  Death  and  before 
the  Judgment.  We  are  to  study  what  can  be 
known  about  it. 

With  educated  people  it  should  not  be  neces 
sary  to  combat  the  foolish  popular  notion  that 
at  death  men  pass  into  their  final  destiny — 
Heaven  or  Hell — and  then  perhaps  thousands 
of  years  afterwards  come  back  to  be  judged  as 
to  that  final  destiny !  To  state  such  a  belief 
should  be  enough  to  refute  it.  Those  who  hold 
it  "  do  err  not  knowing  the  Scriptures."  For 
the  Scriptures  have  no  such  teaching. 

The  Jews  in  our  Lord's  time  believed  in  a 
waiting  life  of  departed  souls  before  the  Judg 
ment.  Owing  to  vagueness  and  contradictions 
in  the  Rabbinical  teaching  it  is  impossible  to 
state  their  notions  about  it  with  definiteness. 
But  in  the  main  it  may  be  said  that  when  they 


34  The  Near  Hereafter 

speak  of  that  life  as  a  whole  without  distin 
guishing  between  the  states  of  the  good  and 
the  evil  they  call  this  whole  by  the  general 
name  of  HADES,  i.  e., "  the  Unseen  "  (the  Hebrew 
word  was  Sheol),  but  they  also  distinguished  in 
it  the  abode  or  state  of  the  Blest  as  PARADISE, 
or  the  "Garden  of  Eden,"  or  "ABRAHAM'S 
BOSOM,"  or  "  UNDER  THE  THRONE,"  e.  g.9 
"  Abraham  whom  God  planted  in  the  Garden  of 
Paradise,"  "our  master  Moses  departed  into 
the  Garden  of  Eden."  The  holy  Judah  rests 
this  day  in  "  Abraham's  Bosom." 

Their  teaching  is  of  course  not  authoritative 
for  us.  Doubtless  many  of  their  notions  on  the 
subject  needed  much  correction.  But  our  Lord 
gives  His  sanction  in  the  main  to  their  belief 
and  uses  their  very  phrases  in  speaking  of 
the  new  life, e.  g.,  Dives  "in  HADES  (not Hell, 
see  R.  V.),  lift  up  his  eyes  being  in  torment " — 
Lazarus  "  was  carried  by  the  angels  into  ABRA 
HAM'S  BOSOM."  "  To-day  thou  shalt  be  with 
Me  in  PARADISE  "  is  His  promise  to  the  dying 
thief.  And  it  is  clear  that  He  did  not  mean  the 
final  Heaven  for  He  says,  "  No  man  hath  as 
cended  into  Heaven  only  the  Son  of  Man  who 
is  in  Heaven."  Even  He  Himself  did  not  go  to 


The  Three  Stages  of  Existence       35 

Heaven  when  He  died,  for  this  is  His  statement 
after  the  Resurrection,  "  I  have  not  yet  as 
cended  unto  My  Father."  "Where,  then,  did  His 
Spirit  go  ?  The  whole  Church  throughout  the 
world  repeats  every  Sunday,  in  the  creed,  "  He 
was  dead  and  buried,  and  descended  in  to  HADES  " 
—the  life  of  the  waiting  souls.  St.  Peter  tells  us 
in  his  first  Epistle  that  in  those  three  days  Christ's 
living  Spirit  went  and  preached  to  the  spirits  in 
safe  keeping  who  had  been  disobedient  in  the 
old  world.  For  which  cause  he  says,  "  was  the 
Gospel  preached  to  them  that  are  dead."  The 
same  thought  was  evidently  in  his  mind  in  his 
first  sermon  (Acts  ii.  31).  "  David,"  he  says, 
"  prophesied  of  the  resurrection  of  Christ  that 
His  soul  was  not  left  in  Hades." 

§* 

And  this  is  the  point  of  view  of  all  the  New 
Testament  Scriptures.     Heaven  and  Hell  are 
always  spoken  of  as  states  after  the  Judgment  / 
and  the  Judgment  is  to  be  in  the  "  end  of  the/ 
world  "  or  the  "  end  of  this  age." 

The  great  crisis  of  expectation  set  before  men 
is  not  death,  but  "  the  Day  when  the  Lord  shall 
appear,"  e.  g.,  "  That  ye  may  be  saved  in  the 


36  The  Near  Hereafter 

Day  of  the  Lord,"  "The  Day  of  the  Lord  is 
as  a  thief  in  the  night,"  "Looking  for  and 
hasting  to  the  coming  of  the  Day  of  God," 
"  Keep  the  commandment  till  the  appearing  of 
our  Lord,"  "To  be  found  with  praise  at  the  ap 
pearing  of  Jesus,"  etc.,  etc.  "Warning,  reproof, 
exhortation,  encouragement  are  all  directed  to 
that  great  day  at  the  end  of  the  Waiting  Life 
— the  Judgment  at  the  second  coming  of  the 
Son  of  Man. 

Naturally  this  belief  passed  into  the  thought 
of  the  early  church.  "  The  souls  of  the  godly 
abide  in  some  better  place  and  the  souls  of  the 
unrighteous  in  a  worse  place  expecting  the  time 
of  judgment.  .  .  .  These  who  hold  that 
when  men  die  their  souls  are  at  once  taken  to 
heaven  are  not  to  be  accounted  Christians  or 
even  Jews  "  (Justin  Martyr,  A.  D.  150,  Dialogue 
with  Trypho).  "  The  souls  of  Christ's  disciples 
go  to  the  invisible  place  determined  for  them  by 
God  and  there  dwell  awaiting  the  Eesurrection  " 
(Irenaeus,  Against  Heretics,  A.  D.  180).  "All 
souls  are  sequestered  in  Hades  till  the  Day  of 
the  Lord  "  (Tertullian,  De  Anima,  A.  D.  200). 
"  Let  no  man  think  that  souls  are  judged  im 
mediately  after  death ;  all  are  detained  in  one 


The  Three  Stages  of  Existence       37 

common  place  of  safe  keeping  till  the  time  when 
the  Supreme  Judge  makes  His  scrutiny  "  (Lac- 
tantius,  Div.  Institutes).  "  During  the  interval 
between  death  and  resurrection  men's  souls  are 
kept  in  hidden  receptacles  according  as  they 
severally  deserve  rest  or  punishment"  (Au 
gustine). 

Does  it  not  all  give  a  fuller  meaning  for  us  to 
the  words  of  our  Lord,  "  In  My  Father's  house 
are  many  mansions  "  (or  abiding  places). 

This  whole  teaching  about  the  Intermediate 
Life  has  been  obscured  in  our  day  by  the  fact 
that  most  people  read  the  Authorized  Version 
of  the  Bible  where  the  word  Hades  has  been 
unfortunately  translated  "  Hell,"  just  the  same 
as  the  darker  word  Gehenna.  At  the  time  of 
the  translation  of  the  Authorized  Version  the 
old  English  word  hell — the  hole — the  unseen, 
had  not  yet  stiffened  into  the  awful  meaning 
that  it  has  attained  in  our  day.  It  was  not  then 
a  word  set  apart  to  designate  the  abode  of  the 
lost.  It  simply  meant  the  "  unseen  place,"  "  the ! 
covered  place."  In  the  south  of  England  still  a  , 
thatcher  who  covers  in  a  house  is  called  a 
"  hellier."  Even  in  games  it  was  used.  In  the 
old  English  games  of  forfeits,  on  the  village 


38  The  Near  Hereafter 

green,  the  "  hell "  is  the  hidden  place  where  the 
girls  ran  away  to  escape  being  kissed.  You 
can  see  it  had  no  awful  meaning  necessarily 
connected  with  it.  Therefore  it  did  not  seem 
repulsive  to  translate  the  Greek  word  "  Hades," 
the  Unseen,  by  the  English  "  Hell."  But  it  has 
become  very  misleading  in  later  days,  and  our 
own  conservative  instincts  which  prevent  our 
altering  the  word  in  the  creed  has  helped  to 
perpetuate  the  error. 

The  revised  version  has  put  all  this  right, 
e.  g.)  "  His  soul  was  not  left  in  Hades  (not  hell), 
nor  did  His  flesh  see  corruption  "  (Acts  ii.  31). 
"  I  have  the  keys  of  death  and  of  Hades " 
(Kev.  i.  18).  At  the  end  of  the  world  "  death 
and  Hades  gave  up  the  dead"  (Kev.  xx.  13). 
In  Hades  (not  hell)  "J;he  rich  man  lifts  up  his 
eyes,  being  in  torment  "  (St.  Luke  xvi.  23). 

§5 

The  Bible,  then,  teaches  to  every  careful 
student  that  there  is  the  Intermediate  Life  be 
yond  the  grave,  a  vivid  conscious  life.  That  all 
men  go  there  when  they  depart  this  life.  No 
man  has  ever  yet  gone  to  Heaven.  No  man  it 
would  seem  has  ever  yet  gone  to  Hell.  No 


The  Three  Stages  of  Existence       39 

man  has  ever  yet  been  finally  judged.  J^o  man 
has  ever  yet  been  finally  damned.  Thank  God 
for  that  at  any  rate.  The  Bible  teaches  that  all 
who  have  ever  left  this  earth  are  waiting  yet — 
from  King  Alfred  to  King  Edward ;  from  St. 
Paul  to  Bishop  Westcott ;  from  the  poor  strag 
gler  of  the  ancient  days  in  the  morning  of  his 
tory  to  the  other  poor  struggler  who  died  last 
night. 

We  are  now  to  study  this  next  stage  of  our 
history,  beginning  at  what  we  call  death  which 
is  really  birth  into  the  next  stage  of  life,  just  as 
the  death  of  the  caterpillar  is  the  birth  of  the 
butterfly.  In  this  next  stage  are  living  to-day 
our  dear  children  and  brothers  and  sisters  and 
wives  and  husbands  within  the  veil.  In  a  very 
few  years  we  shall  all  have  gone  through — each 
of  us  just  the  same  "  I." 

The  Bible  does  not  reveal  very  much  about  it 
as  was  to  be  expected.  The  Bible  is  intended 
to  guide  our  conduct  and  prepare  us  for  a  final 
Heaven.  Therefore  it  busies  itself  with  the 
responsibilities  of  this  present  life  and  the  glories 
of  the  final  prospect — touching  very  lightly  the 
intermediate  stages,  just  as  we  press  on  a  boy 
the  importance  of  his  school  days  and  the  high 


40  The  Near  Hereafter 

prospects  for  his  manhood,  touching  very  little 
the  stages  between.  But  there  is  much  more 
to  be  learned  from  Scripture  about  this  Inter 
mediate  Life  than  most  people  think. 


CHAPTER  III 

WHAT  THE  BIBLE  SAYS  ABOUT  THE 
NEAR  HEEEAFTEE 

WE  are  now  to  enquire  about  that  life 
into  which  our  departed  ones  have 
gone  from  us.  "  I  "  has  gone  on  his 
mysterious  journey  into  the  strange,  new  land. 
"We  are  standing  in  the  darkened  death  chamber, 
where  the  dead  body  lies,  with  close  shut  eyes, 
like  an  empty  house  whence  the  tenant  has 
gone  out,  closing  the  windows  after  him,  and 
the  sobbing  friends  are  feeling  the  inevitable 
pressure  of  the  questions,  "  Where  is  he  ?  What 
is  he  doing  ?  What  is  he  seeing  ?  Can  we 
know  anything  at  all  about  his  condition 
now?" 

Many  of  them  say,  "  No,  we  cannot  know 
anything ;  all  is  vague,  shadowy,  unreal.  It  is 
vain  to  torment  our  hearts  by  thinking."  So 
they  lock  away  his  photographs  and  letters,  and 
they  gradually,  reluctantly  let  him  drop  out  of 
their  conversation  and  their  prayers,  and,  as  far 
as  possible,  out  of  their  thoughts,  trusting  sadly 
41 


42  The  Near  Hereafter 

in  the  healing  influence  of  time  and  forgetful- 
ness  to  quiet  the  aching  questions  in  their 
hearts.  Ah  !  it  is  a  poor  comfort ! 

Some  of  them  even  think  that  there  is  some 
thing  presumptuous  in  intruding  into  mysteries 
which  they  say  God  has  not  revealed.  "  Do 
iK)t  the  secret  things  belong  unto  the  Lord  our 
God  ? "  What  a  pity  they  do  not  complete 
that  text,  "  But  the  things  that  are  revealed 
belong  to  us ; "  and  then  go  on  to  find  out 
whether,  after  all,  God  has  not  revealed  a  great 
deal  more  than  they  think  about  that  mysteri 
ous  journey  on  which  the  beloved  one  has  gone. 
A  reverent  curiosity  concerning  the  life  of  our 
departed  is  surely  not  displeasing  to  God.  "  I 
would  not  have  you  to  be  ignorant,  brethren," 
says  St.  Paul,  "  concerning  them  that  are 
asleep." 

I  wish  I  could  comfort  those  sorrowing  ques 
tioners,  as  I  have  comforted  myself,,  by  thus 
searching  for  what  God  has  revealed.  I  do  not 
want  to  offer  mere  sentimental  guesses.  I  want 
to  find  for  them  the  "  things  that  God  has  re 
vealed,"  and  if  I  draw  some  conclusions  which 
I  cannot  definitely  prove  from  Scripture,  they 
are  only  such  as  seem  to  me  reasonable  and 


The  Bible  and  the  Near  Hereafter    43 

probable  from  a  fair  consideration  of  the  evi 
dence,  and  I  shall  draw  a  clear  distinction  be 
tween  the  authoritative  teaching  of  Scripture, 
which  you  are  bound  to  accept,  and  any  con 
clusions  which  I  draw  from  Scripture,  which 
you  are  free  to  reject. 

Let  me  first  put  your  questionings  into  clear, 
definite  shape,  as  you  look  upon  the  face  of  your 
dead.  Is  it  a  life  of  sleep  and  unconsciousness 
into  which  he  has  gone,  or  is  he  as  fully  alive 
and  conscious  as  he  was  an  hour  ago  ?  Is  there 
further  probation  in  that  life  ?  Is  there  growth 
and  progress  ?  Does  he  still  remember  ?  Does 
he  still  love  ?  Does  he  still  know  or  care  any 
thing  about  the  old  home  and  about  us  who  are 
left  behind  ?  Can  he  help  us  ?  Can  we  help 
him  ?  Are  we  to  think  of  him  as  one  gone 
absolutely  into  the  unknown,  or  may  we  think 
of  him  as  we  do  of  our  other  absent  one  who 
went  to  India  last  year,  only  with  the  differ 
ence  that  one  writes  home  and  the  other  does 
not? 


As  in  all  our  troubles,  we  had  best  go  first 
to  our   Lord,     As   He   is   the   only   one    who 


44  The  Near  Hereafter 

really  knows  all  the  questions  of  our  hearts,  so 
He  is  the  only  one  who  really  knows  the  secrets 
of  the  invisible  world.  He  is  the  only  one  on 
earth  who  has  ever  gone  away  into  that  strange 
land  and  then  came  back  to  tell  us  anything 
about  it.  In  all  things  He  is  our  great  fore 
runner.  He,  the  Son  of  Man,  has  gone  before 
us  poor  sons  of  man  in  all  the  experiences  of 
life, — childhood,  youth,  manhood,  temptation, 
struggle,  sorrow,  disappointment,  victory,  joy. 
And  He  has  gone  before  us,  too,  into  the  Un 
seen  Land,  as  if  to  lead  us  and  say  to  us  "  Be 
not  afraid." 

He  does  not  speak  much  about  it.  As  I  have 
already  shown  you,  this  was  to  be  expected. 
In  the  first  place,  in  our  present  imperfect, 
limited  condition,  with  senses  fitted  only  for 
this  poor  earthly  life,  it  would  probably  be  im 
possible  to  teach  us  anything  definitely  about 
the  higher  life  of  the  spirit  world.  How  can 
you  teach  a  blind,  deaf  man  about  this  world  of 
beautiful  sights  and  sounds  in  which  you  are 
living  ?  How  could  God  teach  us  definite  de 
tails  about  a  life  which  no  experience  of  ours 
can  help  us  to  imagine  ?  And,  besides  that, 
Scripture  is  intended  to  guide  our  conduct  in 


The  Bible  and  the  Near  Hereafter     45 

this  world,  not  to  gratify  our  speculations  about 
another  world.  At  any  rate,  there  is  a  marked 
reticence  and  reserve  all  through  the  Bible  in 
speaking  of  the  Hereafter,  which  reticence  and 
reserve  we  shall  do  well  to  imitate. 

§1 

First,  watch  our  Lord  draw  the  curtain  a 
little  in  His  story  of  the  Eich  Man  and 
Lazarus.  The  "story"  I  say,  not  the  "par 
able."  It  is  no  parable.  A  parable  is  the 
statement  of  an  analogy  between  visible  things 
and  invisible.  This  is  a  direct  statement  about 
the  invisible  things  themselves.  Jesus  is  tell 
ing  what  happens  after  death.  Indeed,  many 
in  the  early  Church  thought,  and  many  to-day 
think,  that  this  is  a  direct  historical  account  by 
Christ  of  the  life  of  a  certain  selfish  rich  man 
in  Jerusalem  whom  He  knew  and  of  a  certain 
beggar  that  lay  at  his  gate.  They  died  and 
were  buried,  and  those  who  followed  them  to 
the  grave  could  see  no  further.  But  the  Lord 
is  watching  them  still  as  they  pass  into  the  land 
which  He  knew  so  well.  Whether  this  was 
the  story  of  a  certain  man,  or  only  a  general 
statement  about  all  such  men,  does  not  matter. 


46  The  Near  Hereafter 

Christ  was  telling  of  what  happens  just  after 
death,  when  the  "I,"  the  self,  has  laid  aside  the 
body  and  gone  out  into  the  Unseen. 

I  do  not  mean  that  this  story  is  intended  as  a 
revelation  of  that  life.  If  it  were  it  would 
doubtless  have  been  more  complete.  It  is 
simply  a  passing  reference  to  it  in  warning 
against  the  danger  of  a  selfish  life.  But  it  lifts 
the  curtain  a  little  bit. 


Be  quite  clear  about  this  —  that  our  Lord 
is  not  speaking  of  the  FAR  Hereafter  —  of  the 
final  stage  of  human  life  at  the  end  of  the 
world,  in  which  after  the  Final  Judgment 
come  Heaven  and  Hell.  He  is  speaking  of  the 
near  Hereafter,  the  life  immediately  after  death. 
We  have  seen  that  there  are  three  stages  in  our 
history  :  1st.  This  Earth  life,  where  the  "  I," 
the  self,  has  a  body  woven  around  it.  2nd.  The 
Intermediate  Life  before  the  Judgment,  into 
which  I  go  at  death  without  my  body  into  my 
second  stage  of  being.  3rd.  The  final  stage 
at  the  end  of  the  age  in  which  come  the  Final 
Judgment  and  Heaven  and  Hell,  which  stage  is 
still  in  the  future  for  all  humanity. 


The  Bible  and  the  Near  Hereafter     47 

Clearly  our  Lord  is  speaking  of  the  Inter 
mediate  Life,  of  the  unseen  life  existing  to-day, 
running  on  side  by  side  with  the  earthly  life. 
For  you  see  the  men  He  speaks  of  are  not  long 
dead.  Dives'  brothers  are  still  living  here. 
Dives  is  quite  conscious  that  the  ordinary  life 
of  men  is  still  going  on  on  earth  side  by  side 
with  that  other  life.  Clearly  Jesus  is  telling  of 
the  present  stage  in  the  life  of  the  departed — 
that  life  in  which  all  our  dear  departed  ones  are 
living  at  this  moment. 

§3 

Next  I  notice  that  that  life  in  its  inmost  ex 
periences  seems  very  like  this  life,  and  follows 
from  it  quite  naturally.  He  depicts  it  as  a 
clear,  conscious  life.  They  are  not  dead  nor 
asleep  nor  unconscious.  They  are  very  much 
alive.  He  represents  them  as  thinking  and 
speaking  and  feeling.  Lazarus  is  feeling  "  com 
forted."  Dives  is  feeling  "tormented,"  and 
thinking  keenly  of  his  own  misery  and  of  his 
brothers'  danger  on  earth  at  that  moment.  So 
actively  alive  are  they  all  to  him  that  he  wants 
one  of  them  to  go  back  to  earth  to  tell  his 
brothers  about  it. 


48  The  Near  Hereafter 

Be  quite  clear  about  this.  Challenge  every 
statement  as  I  go  on.  Is  this  a  mere  specula 
tion  of  mine  or  have  we  Christ's  authority  for 
saying  that  in  the  new  environment  men  are 
living  a  life  as  clear  and  vivid  and  conscious  as 
on  this  earth — that  death  makes  no  break  ? 

§4 

Next  I  learn  that  each  feels  himself  the 
same  continuous  "  I "  that  he  was  on  earth. 
Lazarus  feels  himself  the  same  Lazarus,  Dives 
feels  himself  the  same  Dives,  the  brother  of 
those  five  boys.  I  shall  still  keep  on  saying 
"I."  I  am  not  somebody  else  over  there. 
That  is  what  Jesus  said  from  the  other  side  of 
the  grave — "  Handle  Me  and  see — it  is  I,  My 
self." 

§5 

Next  I  read  on  His  authority  that  there  is 
no  break  in  memory.  Of  course  there  could 
not  be  if  I  am  still  "  I."  But  our  Lord  con 
firms  this.  Lazarus  remembers  Dives.  Dives 
remembers  Lazarus  so  well  that  he  wants  him 
to  go  back  to  convert  his  brothers.  Aye,  he 
remembers  the  brothers  in  the  old  Jerusalem 
home,  the  five  boys  that  grew  up  beside  him. 


The  Bible  and  the  Near  Hereafter     49 

He  remembers  sorrowfully  that  they  have 
grown  to  be  selfish  men  like  himself,  perhaps 
through  his  fault.  He  is  thinking  about  them 
and  troubling  about  them.  And  Abraham  as 
sumes  this  memory  as  a  matter  of  course.  "  My 
son,  remember  that  thou  in  thy  lifetime,  etc." 

Does  not  all  this  confirm  our  statement  in 
Chapter  I,  that  memory  is  something  more  than 
impressions  on  the  gray  matter  of  the  brain ; 
that  memory  is  in  the  man  himself  who  is  be 
hind  the  brain  and,  therefore,  must  go  on  with 
him. 

§6 

I  read  on,  "  Now  he  is  comforted  and  thou 
art  tormented."  That  again  is  just  what  I 
should  expect.  It  is  all  quite  natural.  If  "  I  " 
am  still  the  same  "  I  "  in  full  vivid  conscious 
life,  in  full  memory  of  the  past — if  I  have 
passed  out  of  the  mists  of  earth  into  the  full 
light  of  the  Eternal,  where  everything  is  seen 
at  its  full  value,  where  money  counts  for  noth 
ing  and  love  counts  for  everything,  it  is  of 
course  natural  that  the  good  man  should  feel 
comforted  and  the  bad  man  should  feel  tor 
mented. 


50  The  Near  Hereafter 

Only  more  so.  Only  more  so.  That  is  the 
difference.  The  poor  humble  follower  of 
Christ,  even  on  earth,  is  in  the  main  happy— 
at  his  best  moments.  But  he  is  not  always 
very  happy.  He  has  the  inner  comfort  of  the 
peace  of  God.  But  there  is  much  worry  and 
distraction,  about  his  business  and  his  sickness 
and  his  troubles  of  many  kinds  to  spoil  his 
peace.  All  these  earthly  troubles  are  gone  now. 
He  sees  Christ.  He  knows  of  the  boundless 
joy  before  him  by  and  by.  He  is  comforted. 

And  I  read  that  Dives  "  is  tormented."  Here 
again  all  is  natural  and  as  we  should  expect. 
The  godless  man  is  in  some  degree  tormented 
in  this  life — at  his  best  moments,  when  he  stops 
to  think,  when  he  lies  awake  in  the  lonely  night 
and  conscience  speaks  to  him.  But  there  are 
many  distractions  to  ease  his  pain— the  pleasures 
and  amusements  of  life,  the  company  of  friends, 
the  pursuit  of  business,  the  excitements  of  ambi 
tion.  So  he  can  manage  a  good  deal  to  forget 
God,  to  acquire  a  distaste  for  God,  and  yet  to 
dull  the  still  small  voice  that  hurts  him.  But 
these  distractions  are  gone  now.  He  has  gone 
out  into  the  new  life,  naked,  alone.  All  the 
money  and  business  excitement  are  gone.  All 


The  Bible  and  the  Near  Hereafter     51 

the  things  of  sense  and  appetite  are  gone. 
That  poor  soul  of  his,  dwarfed  and  degraded, 
stands  in  the  dread  loneliness  before  God,  full 
of  the  sense  of  loss  and  misery — of  shame  for 
the  past — of  dread  of  what  is  to  come — of 
wretched  discord  between  himself  and  all  that 
is  good.  In  Hades,  says  Christ,  not  in  Hell  (the 
Revised  Yersion  puts  that  right),  in  that  life 
just  after  death,  he  lifted  up  his  eyes,  being  in 
torment.  The  Judgment  has  not  come  yet. 
He  is  not  in  Hell.  Hell  has  not  yet  come. 
Those  things  are  in  the  final  stage  of  being. 
But  already,  just  after  death,  Christ  says,  he  is 
in  torment  of  soul. 

§fa 
I 

I  do  not  think  we  should  pass  over  the  ex 
pression  "carried  by  the  angels  into  Abra 
ham's  bosom."  Notice  that  our  Lord  makes  it 
simple  and  intelligible  for  the  Jews  by  using 
their  own  phrase,  "  Abraham's  Bosom,"  their 
name  for  the  state  of  the  faithful  departed  im 
mediately  after  death.  And  He  says,  Lazarus 
"  was  carried  by  the  angels."  If  anybody  else 
but  Jesus  had  said  it,  we  might  pass  this  over 
as  a  piece  of  poetic  imagery.  But  it  was  Jesus 


52  The  Near  Hereafter 

who  said  it.  He  says  so  much  about  the  angels. 
He  says  that  there  are  guardian  angels  of  the 
children.  He  says  that  the  angels  rejoice  over 
one  sinner  that  repenteth.  He  would  not  say 
this  about  Lazarus  carried  by  the  angels  unless 
it  meant  something  real.  If  so  I  think  we  have 
here  our  Lord's  authority  for  the  ministry  of 
angels  at  death,  an  indication  that  the  poor  soul 
does  not  go  out  solitary  into  a  great  lone  land 
— that  there  are  loving  watchers  around  the 
death-bed  "  sent  forth  to  minister  to  the  heirs  of 
salvation." 

§8 
I  do  not  know  how  much  weight  we  should 

attach  to  the  suggestion  that  Dives  seems  the 
better  for  the  discipline  of  the  new  life.  His 
selfishness  on  earth  bulks  largely  in  the  story. 
Now  in  all  his  trouble  he  is  thinking  of  his  five 
brothers  "  lest  they  also  come  to  this  place  of 
torment." 

§9 

The  next  words  suggest  a  very  serious  and 
awful  question.  Is  the  destiny  and  the  con 
dition  of  every  soul  fixed  forever  at  death? 


The  Bible  and  the  Near  Hereafter     53 

What  is  the  meaning  of  the  phrase  :  "  Between 
us  and  you  there  is  a  great  gulf  fixed  "  ?  That 
is  too  large  a  question  to  deal  with  here.  I 
postpone  it  to  a  later  chapter.  I  have  al 
ready  reminded  you  of  the  tremendous  impor 
tance  of  this  life  in  its  bearing  on  our  final 
destiny. 

Ill 

We  get  another  hint  of  the  Unseen  Life  in 
the  story  of  the  Transfiguration,  when  Moses 
and  Elijah,  two  of  the  greatest  souls  of  the  old 
world  days  in  the  wondrous  Waiting  Life,  come 
out  from  that  life  to  meet  the  Lord  and  to 
speak  with  Him  "of  His  decease,  which  He 
should  accomplish  at  Jerusalem  "  (Luke  ix.  31). 
Does  it  not  suggest  at  once  the  deep  interest 
which  they  and  their  comrades,  the  great  souls 
within  the  Yeil,  were  taking  in  the  mighty 
scheme  of  Redemption  that  was  being  worked 
out  on  earth  ?  Does  it  not  suggest  that  in  the 
spirit  land  they  are  watching  our  doings  here  ? 
Does  it  not  help  us  to  anticipate  the  joy  in  that 
wondrous  life  when,  straight  from  the  Cross, 
Christ  the  triumphant  victor  "descended  into 
Hades  "  (Apostles'  Creed)  to  proclaim  the  glad 


54  The  Near  Hereafter 

news  to  the  dead  (1  Peter  iv.  18) ;  to  unfurl  His 
banner  and  set  up  His  Cross  in  the  great  world 
of  the  departed  ? 

IV 

Our  next  hint  conies  when  the  Lord  is  dying 
on  the  Cross.  The  penitent  thief  is  hanging 
beside  Him.  Death  is  drawing  near.  The  poor 
sinner  is  about  to  take  the  leap  off  into  the  dark. 
He  does  not  know  what  is  before  him :  Dark 
ness  —  unconsciousness  —  nothingness  —  what  ? 
He  does  not  know.  The  only  one  on  earth  who 
does  know  is  on  a  cross  beside  him.  "  LORD, 

REMEMBER   ME   WHEN   THOU  COMEST  IN  THY 

KINGDOM."  And  Jesus  said :  "  TO-DAY  THOU 
SHALT  BE  WITH  ME  IN  PARADISE."  Not  in 
Heaven,  but  in  Paradise — the  Jews'  word  for 
the  resting  place  of  good  men  after  death. 
Now,  when  one  man  says  to  another  at  such  a 
time,  "  To-day  you  shall  be  with  me,"  surely  it 
suggests,  "  You  and  I  will  be  living  a  full,  con 
scious  life,  and  you  will  remember  our  acquaint 
ance  here  upon  the  earth ;  we  shall  know  each 
other  as  the  two  who  hung  together  this  morn 
ing  on  calvary."  Does  it  not,  at  least  suggest, 
recognition  in  the  Unseen  Land  ? 


CHAPTER  IY 

WHAT    THE   BIBLE  AND    THE  CHUECH 
SAY  ABOUT  THE  NEAR  HEREAFTER 

ONLY  three  hours  later  the  Lord  passed 
through    into    that    Unseen    Land. 
"  Father,  into  Thy  hands  I  commend 
My  spirit,  and  having  said  this  He  gave  up  the 
ghost,"  and  departed  on  the  mysterious  journey. 
If  we  could  know  anything  about  what  He  saw 
and  did  on  that  mysterious  journey  surely  it 
would  give  some  hints  about  our  dear  ones 
departed. 


That  journey  of  the  Lord  into  the  world  of 
the  dead  has  been  made  a  great  article  of  the 
Christian  faith.  We  all  repeat  it  regularly  in 
the  Apostles'  Creed,  "  He  descended  into  Hell." 
I  need  not  translate  that  clause.  Every  well 
taught  Sunday-school  child  knows  its  meaning. 
"  He  descended  into  Hades,"  into  the  world  of 
the  departed  in  the  great  waiting  life  before  the 
65 


56  The  Near  Hereafter 

Judgment.     But  there  is  a  great  deal  more  than 
this  to  be  said  about  it. 

Now,  let  us  consider  this  statement.  Clearly 
it  deals  with  the  three  days  between  our  Lord's 
death  and  resurrection.  Where  did  His  spirit 
go  ?  "  To  heaven,  of  course,"  somebody  says. 
"  No,"  says  the  Lord  Himself  after  the  resur 
rection,  "  I  have  not  yet  ascended  to  My 
Father."  Where,  then,  did  His  spirit  go? 
"  Nobody  can  tell,"  you  say.  Yes,  one  person 
could  tell,  and  only  one- — the  Lord  Himself. 
He  only  could  have  told  of  His  solitary  tempta 
tion  in  the  wilderness,  and  He  evidently  told 
it.  He  only  could  have  told  of  the  solitary 
scene  in  Gethsemane,  it  would  seem  that  He 
told  it.  He  only  could  have  told  of  His  visit 
to  the  world  of  the  dead,  and  I  think  that  He 
told  it.  You  remember  that  after  the  resur 
rection  He  was  with  them  "  forty  days  teach 
ing  the  things  concerning  the  Kingdom."  I 
think  He  must  have  told  them  then  of  those 
three  days.  Why?  Because  the  knowledge 
of  it  was  so  wide-spread  in  the  early  Church,  and 
there  was  no  one  else  to  tell  it.  Some  people 
seem  to  think  that  there  are  only  some  obscure 
verses  of  St.  Peter  and  a  few  references  of  St. 


The  Church  and  the  Near  Hereafter    57 

Paul  in  favour  of  such  teaching.  Not  at  all. 
It  was  the  belief  of  the  whole  Church.  St. 
Peter  and  St.  Paul  were  only  two  in  a  crowd 
of  teachers  of  early  days  who  proclaimed 
triumphantly  the  visit  of  the  Lord  into  the 
world  of  the  dead.  St.  Peter  seems  to  be  think 
ing  of  it  in  his  first  sermon  when  he  quotes : 
"  His  soul  was  not  left  in  Hades  "  (Acts  ii.  31). 
Therefore  St.  Peter  knew  that  it  was  into  that 
intermediate  life — not  into  that  final  Heaven — 
that  our  Lord  went  at  death.  This  statement 
by  itself  would  not  prove  much,  but  when  I 
find  the  same  St.  Peter  long  afterwards  telling 
so  circumstantially  in  his  first  epistle  (iii.  18) 
that  when  his  Master  was  put  to  death  in  the 
flesh  He  was  made  more  alive  in  the  spirit,  in 
which  spirit  He  went  and  preached  to  the  spirits 
in  prison  who  had  been  disobedient  at  the  flood. 
"  For  which  cause  (chap.  iv.  6)  was  the  gospel — 
the  glad  news — preached  to  them  that  are  dead," 
I  think  it  is  a  fair  inference  that  St.  Peter  had 
some  definite  information.  And  then  I  find 
St.  Paul,  in  Eph.  iv.  9,  when  he  is  writing  of 
the  gifts  bestowed  on  the  Church  by  her  as 
cended  Lord.  The  word  "ascended"  causes 
him  to  pause  abruptly.  Men  must  not  think 


58  The  Near  Hereafter 

that  His  work  in  the  unseen  was  limited  to  that 
work  for  us  in  Heaven  after  His  ascension. 
"Now  that  He  ascended,  what  is  it  but  that 
He  descended  first  into  the  lower  parts  of  the 
earth  (i.  e.,  the  world  of  the  departed)  that  He 
might  fill  all  things."  Hades  and  Heaven  had 
alike  felt  the  glory  of  His  presence. 

And  then  immediately  after  the  Apostles' 
days  I  find  the  knowledge  wide-spread  in  the 
Church.  I  read  the  writings  of  the  ancient 
bishops  and  teachers  of  the  Church,  beginning 
at  the  death  of  St.  John,  the  very  men  to  whom 
we  refer  for  information  as  to  the  Baptism  and 
Holy  Communion  and  the  authenticity  of  the 
four  Gospels,  and  there  I  find  prominently  in 
their  preaching  the  gospel  of  our  Lord's  visit 
to  the  world  of  the  departed. 


The  earliest  is  known  as  Justin  Martyr.  He 
was  born  about  the  time  of  St.  John's  death, 
and  he  feels  so  strongly  about  the  Descent  into 
Hades  that  he  actually  charges  the  Jews  with 
mutilating  a  prophecy  of  Jeremiah  foretelling  it. 

Irena3us,  the  great  Bishop  of  Lyons  in  France, 
a  little  while  later  tells  how  the  Lord  descended 


The  Church  and  the  Near  Hereafter    59 

into  the  world  of  the  dead,  preaching  to  the 
departed,  and  all  who  had  hopes  in  Him,  and 
submitted  to  His  dispensations,  received  remis 
sion  of  sins. 

Then  away  in  Egypt  comes  St.  Clement 
of  Alexandria,  born  about  fifty  years  after 
St.  John's  death.  I  have  been  greatly  in 
terested  in  some  little  touches  in  his  chapter 
on  the  descent  into  the  world  of  the  dead. 
He  asserts  as  the  direct  teaching  of  Scripture 
that  our  Lord  preached  the  Gospel  to  the  dead, 
but  he  thinks  that  the  souls  of  the  Apostles 
must  have  taken  up  the  same  task  when  they 
died,  and  that  it  was  not  merely  to  Jews  and 
saints,  but  to  heathen  as  well — as  was  only 
fair,  he  says,  since  they  had  no  chance  of 
knowing.  Don't  you  like  that  honest  appeal 
of  his  "  as  was  only  fair  "  ? 

St.  Clement's  great  disciple,  Origen,  comes 
next.  His  evidence  comes  in  curiously.  A 
famous  infidel  named  Celsus,  knowing  of  this 
wide-spread  creed  of  the  Church  about  the 
preaching  in  Hades,  laughs  at  the  Christians. 
"  I  suppose  your  Master  when  He  failed  to 
persuade  the  living  had  to  try  and  persuada 
the  dead?"  Origen  meets  the  question 


60  The  Near  Hereafter 

straight  out :  "  Whether  it  please  Celsus  or 
no,  we  of  the  Church  assert  that  the  soul 
of  our  Lord,  stript  of  its  body,  held  converse 
with  other  souls  that  He  might  convert  those 
capable  of  instruction." 

Then  away  in  Western  Africa,  the  Church's 
belief  is  represented  by  another  great  teacher, 
Tertullian.  In  Jerusalem,  Cyril  the  Bishop, 
teaches  the  people  in  his  catechetical  lectures 
this  faith  of  the  Church  with  a  ring  of  gladness 
and  triumph.  He  sees  Christ  not  only  amid 
the  souls  who  had  once  been  disobedient, 
but  also  in  blessed  intercourse  with  the  strug- 
glers  after  right  who  had  never  seen  His  face 
on  earth.  He  pictures  how  the  holy  prophets 
ran  to  our  Lord,  how  Moses,  and  Abraham,  and 
Isaac,  and  Jacob,  and  David,  and  Samuel,  and 
John  the  Baptist,  ran  to  Him  with  the  cry, 
"  Oh,  Death,  where  is  thy  sting?  Oh,  Grave, 
where  is  thy  victory,  for  the  Conqueror  has 
redeemed  us." 

I  cannot  go  on  to  tell  of  St.  Athanasius  and 
the  rest.  I  have  said  enough  to  show  you  that 
in  the  early  ages  of  the  Church — the  pure  lov 
ing  ages — nearest  to  the  Lord  and  to  the 
Apostles,  the  Church  rejoiced  in  the  glad 


The  Church  and  the  Near  Hereafter    61 

belief  that  Christ  went  and  visited  the  spirits 
in  the  Unseen  who  had  never  seen  His  face  on 
earth.1 


This  was  one  of  the  gladdest  notes  in  the 
whole  Gospel  harmony  of  the  early  Church  for 
five  hundred  years,  in  the  purest  and  most  lov 
ing  days,  the  days  nearest  our  Lord  and  His 
Apostles.  It  was  a  note  of  triumph.  It  told 
of  the  tender,  thoughtful  love  of  Christ  for  the 
faithful  souls  who  had  never  seen  Hun.  It 
told  of  the  universality  of  His  Atonement.  It 
told  of  victory,  far  beyond  this  life.  It  told 
that  Christ,  who  came  to  seek  and  save  men's 
souls  on  earth,  had  continued  that  work  in  the 
world  of  the  dead  while  His  body  lay  in  the 
grave.  That  He  passed  into  the  unseen  world 
as  a  saviour  and  conqueror.  That  His  banner 
was  unfurled  there  and  His  cross  set  up  there 
in  the  world  of  the  departed.  That  the  souls 
of  all  the  ancient  world  who  had  never  known 
Him,  and  WHO  WEKE  CAPABLE  OF  TURNING 
TO  HIM  (i.  e.,  who  in  their  earthly  probation, 

1  See  Plumptre,  The  Spirits  in  Prison. 


62  The  Near  Hereafter 

in  spite  of  all  their  ignorance  and  sin,  had  not 
irrevocably  turned  away  from  God  and  good), 
might  turn  to  Him  and  live.  That  the  spirits  of 
the  old-world  saints  and  prophets  had  welcomed 
Him  with  rejoicing.  That  even  men  of  much 
lower  place  had  yet  found  mercy.  That  even 
such  men  as  those  who  had  perished  in  the 
flood  in  God's  great  judgment,  BUT  HAD  NOT 

HAEDENED  THEMSELVES  AGAINST  HlS  RIGHT 
EOUSNESS  AND  LOVE,  were  not  shut  out  from 
hope.  In  the  "  many  mansions  "  was  a  place 
even  for  such  as  they.  To  the  teachers  of  the 
early  Church,  I  repeat,  it  was  one  of  the  most 
triumphant  notes  in  their  gospel — the  wideness 
of  Christ's  Atonement. 

§4 

That  is  what  we  mean,  then,  by  the  descent 
into  Hades.  Does  it  not  give  a  vivid  reality 
to  that  world  that  we  think  of  so  vaguely  ? 
Think  of  it.  Was  there  ever  before  or  since 
such  a  scene,  such  a  preaching,  such  a  preacher, 
such  a  congregation  ?  Could  the  wildest  flights 
of  imagination  go  further  ?  Yet  it  is  all  sober 
fact.  Try  to  picture  it  for  yourselves  for 
a  moment.  The  Lord  hanging  on  the  cross, 


The  Church  and  the  Near  Hereafter   63 

with  His  heart  full  of  pain  for  that  humanity 
that  He  was  redeeming ;  and  yet  surely  full 
of  triumph,  too,  and  glad  anticipation.  He 
was  going  to  show  Himself  to  the  poor  souls 
who  in  the  dark  old  world  days  had  loved  God 
and  Right.  He  had  finished  the  work  that  was 
given  Him  to  do.  He  was  leaving  His  Church 
with  that  blessed  gospel  of  salvation  to  preach 
through  the  centuries  to  all  souls  on  earth. 
But  what  of  the  souls  who  had  gone  out 
of  earth  from  the  beginning  of  the  world 
without  knowing  Him  ?  The  Church  replies, 
through  her  Bible  and  through  her  Creed  and 
through  her  early  teachers,  that  the  Lord  was 
not  forgetting  them.  He  was  about  to  go 
forth  in  a  few  moments,  "quickened  in  His 
spirit,"  to  bring  His  glad  gospel  to  the  waiting 
souls.  That  was  the  first  great  missionary 
work  of  the  Church.  May  we  not  reverently 
see  His  own  anticipation  of  it  in  His  departing 
words  as  He  started  on  His  mission,  "  Father, 
into  Thy  hands  do  I  commend  My  spirit  "  (in 
the  journey  on  which  it  is  going).  May  we  not 
read  it  in  that  "  au  revoir,"  not  "  good-bye,"  to 
the  thief  beside  Him,  "  To-day  you  shall  be  with 
Me  in  Paradise  "  ?  May  we  not  dwell  on  the 


64  The  Near  Hereafter 

wonder  and  joy  and  gratitude  and  love  which 
must  have  shaken  that  world  within  the  veil, 
as  the  loving  conqueror  came  in  amongst  them  ? 
And  may  we  not  reverently  follow  Him  still  in 
thought  when  He  returned  to  earth  and,  as  we 
conjecture,  somewhere  in  the  Forty  Days  after 
the  Eesurrection,  told  His  disciples  of  His  mar 
vellous  experience  ?  I  am  not  laying  down  this 
as  a  statement  of  Scripture,  but  I  think  it  is 
a  fair  conjecture,  for  how  else  could  they  have 
learned  it  ?  And  if  we  are  right ;  think  how 
the  knowledge  of  it  would  swell  the  glad  con 
fidence  of  St.  Paul.  "  For  I  am  persuaded  that 
neither  DEATH,  nor  LIFE,  nor  angels,  nor 
principalities,  nor  powers,  nor  height,  nor 
depth,  nor  any  other  creature,  is  able  to 
separate  us  from  the  love  of  God  which  is  in 
Christ  Jesus  our  Lord." 

§5 

I  think  we  must  see  that  this  teaching  of 
the  Apostles  and  apostolic  men  of  the  whole 
early  Church  is  true.  People  sometimes  ask, 
"  Why,  then,  is  it  new  in  our  day  ?  "  The  an 
swer  is  easy.  At  the  Reformation  time  there 
were  terrible  abuses  connected  with  the 


The  Church  and  the  Near  Hereafter    65 

Church's  doctrine  of  the  Intermediate  Life. 
The  practice  of  purchased  Masses,  and  Pardons, 
and  Indulgences,  and  all  the  absurdities  con 
nected  with  the  Koman  purgatory,  so  ex 
emplified  in  Tetzel's  cry,  "  When  money  clinks 
at  the  bottom  of  my  box  a  soul  is  released  from 
purgatory."  With  such  provocation  one  does 
not  wonder — though  one  may  greatly  regret — 
that  the  indignant  reformers,  in  sweeping  away 
the  falsehood,  sometimes  swept  away  also  the  un 
derlying  truth.  The  teaching  about  the  Inter 
mediate  Life,  and  the  old  practice  of  the  Church 
in  remembering  her  faithful  departed  in  prayer, 
were  all  put  in  the  background  as  leading  to 
dangerous  abuse ;  and  so  the  people,  getting  no 
real  teaching  about  it,  got  the  sad  habit  of  try 
ing  to  forget  about  the  state  of  their  dear  ones 
departed.  In  their  ignorance,  they  could  only 
guess  blindly  what  the  Creed  here  means.  So 
for  centuries  this  has  been  the  "  lost  article  of 
the  Creed."  But  this  teaching  of  the  Creed  is 
none  the  less  true,  because  it  has  been  neglected 
in  later  days.  And  if  it  be  true,  it  is  well  worth 
our  attention,  for  it  confirms  what  we  have  al 
ready  learned  from  the  previous  teaching  of 
the  Lord,  that  the  life  of  the  departed  is  a 


66  The  Near  Hereafter 

clear,  vivid,  conscious  life,  since  Christ  could 
teach  them  and  they  could  learn. 

And  it  suggests  that  the  departed  souls  of  the 
old  world  who  had  no  chance  of  knowing  Him 
have  not  by  death  lost  all  capacity  for  repenting 
and  receiving  Christ.  Those  men  that  St.  Peter 
thinks  of  had  perished  in  God's  great  judgment, 
but  it  would  seem  in  their  terrible  fate  they 
had  not  hardened  themselves  irrevocably  against 
God.  Those  who  do  that  on  earth  seem  to  close 
the  door  for  ever.  That  is  the  sin  against  the 
Holy  Ghost — the  only  sin  which  our  Lord  says 
hath  never  forgiveness  either  in  this  world  or 
in  the  world  to  come.  These  evidently  had 
still  their  capacity  for  repentance.  And  this 
gives  one  stirrings  of  hope  in  the  perplexities 
of  God's  awful  judgments.  Don't  be  afraid  to 
think  this.  There  is  not  one  word  in  Scripture 
to  forbid  our  thinking  it.  It  merely  means  that 
in  the  terrible  fate  which  they  had  brought  on 
themselves  they  had  not  utterly  hardened  their 
hearts — and  Christ  had  not  forgotten  them  in 
their  misery. 

§/• 
Q 

Estimate  fairly  the  value  of  this  evidence  for 
our  Lord's  visit  to  the  Unseen  Life.  Do  not 


The  Church  and  the  Near  Hereafter   67 

overestimate  it.  It  is  not  all  Scripture.  But 
all  that  is  not  Scripture  is  the  wide-spread  belief 
of  the  primitive  Church  which  was  afterwards 
crystallized  into  an  article  of  the  Creed.  Surely 
it  is  enough  to  deepen  our  sense  of  the  reality 
of  that  Unseen  Life.  It  strongly  confirms  what 
we  have  learned  already — that  that  life  is  a 
vivid,  conscious  life  into  which  "I"  go  my 
"  self,"  with  my  full  memory  of  the  past.  And 
do  not  misread  it.  It  is  not  offering  any  hope 
to  wicked  men  who,  with  full  knowledge  of 
Christ,  wilfully  reject  Him.  It  tells  of  men 
who  had  never  known  Him,  and  has  hope  only 
of  those  "  who  were  capable  of  receiving  Him." 
There  is  nothing  here  to  make  light  of  the  re 
sponsibility  of  this  life. 

But  this  message  comes  to  us  to  comfort  the 
hearts  and  strengthen  the  faith  of  thinking 
men  and  women  who  are  puzzled  and  perplexed 
and  estranged  from  Christ  by  the  terrible  per 
plexities  of  life  and  of  God's  judgments  as  they 
understand  or  misunderstand  them.  You  have 
often  thought  of  the  difficulty  of  reconciling  the 
righteous  justice  of  God  with  His  Fatherly  love. 
You  have  often  thought,  in  wondering  doubt, 
"  Why  did  Christ  come  so  late  in  the  world's 


68  The  Near  Hereafter 

history  ?  What  of  all  the  old-world  souls  who 
could  not  have  known  Him  here  on  earth  ?  For 
you  know  that  there  is  no  salvation  save  by 
Jesus  Christ.  You  have  read  in  the  Old  Testa 
ment  of  whole  nations,  men,  women  and  little 
children,  swept  away  in  one  dread  destruction. 
What  of  them  ?  You  have  wondered  about  the 
vast  heathen  world  passing  in  thousands  every 
day  into  the  Unseen,  with  no  knowledge  of 
Him.  You  have  sometimes  read  the  Registrar- 
General's  return  of  deaths  in  your  city,  and 
thought  of  all  the  little  dead  children,  brought 
up  in  evil  homes ;  of  sullen  prisoners  hardened 
in  the  jails ;  of  grown  men  and  women  in  the 
city's  slums  who,  through  the  hardening  in 
fluence  of  circumstances,  had  little  real  chance 
of  ever  being  touched  by  that  tenderness  of 
God's  love  which  leads  men  to  love  Him  in  re 
turn.  You  know  they  have  not  died  in  Christ. 
What  of  them  ?  "  If  you  had  to  stand  at  some 
death-beds  at  which  some  of  us  have  to 
stand  you  would  feel  as  we  do  the  insistent 
pressure  of  that  question  for  all  in  the  ancient 
or  modern  world — the  vast  countless  world  of  the 
dead — who  had  no  real  chance  of  knowing  Christ 
or  being  touched  by  His  love  here  on  earth. 


The  Church  and  the  Near  Hereafter   69 

Oh,  the  generations  old 
Over  whom  no  church  bell  tolled 
Christless  lifting  up  blind  eyes 
To  the  silence  of  the  skies. 

For  the  innumerable  dead 

Is  my  soul  disquieted  ! 

Trust  them  with  God,  says  this  teaching  of 
the  Creed.  Christ  will  do  right  by  them. 
Christ  does  not  forget  them. 

Trust  Him,  though  thy  sight  be  dim, 
Doubt  for  them  is  doubt  of  Him. 


Still  Thy  love,  O  Christ,  arisen 
Yearns  to  reach  those  souls  in  prison, 
Through  all  depths  of  sin  and  loss 
Sinks  the  plummet  of  Thy  Cross. 
Never  yet  abyss  was  found 
Deeper  than  that  Cross  could  sound. 

In  these  two  chapters  we  have  touched  on  the 
chief  statements  in  the  New  Testament  and  in 
the  beliefs  of  the  primitive  Church  as  to  the  near 
Hereafter.  There  are  others  of  less  importance 
to  be  referred  to  as  we  go  on.  It  seemed  well 
to  lay  down  some  basis  to  proceed  on. 


CHAPTER  V 
THE  CEISIS  OF  DEATH 

I  1ST  an  earlier  chapter  I  placed  you  in  imagi 
nation  in  the  darkened  death  chamber, 
looking  on  the  face  of  your  dead  and  feel 
ing  the  keen  pressure  of  the  inevitable  ques 
tions  :  What  has  happened  to  him  ?  Where  is 
he  ?  What  is  he  seeing  ?  What  is  he  knowing 
in  that  mysterious  world  into  which  he  has 
gone? 

That  death  chamber  is  the  best  place  on  earth 
for  solemn  thought  about  the  Hereafter.  But 
when  you  are  thinking  only  of  your  own  dead 
and  your  heart  is  all  quivering  in  pain  and  long 
ing  you  are  not  in  the  best  condition  for  cool, 
clear  searching  after  truth.  Imagination  and 
sentiment  are  apt  to  run  away  with  reason. 
The  tender  tortured  woman  is  apt  to  believe  too 
easily  what  the  heart  longs  to  believe.  The 
stricken  man  in  his  deep  numb  pain  is  in  danger 
of  yielding  to  hopeless  doubt  about  it  all. 

So  I  lifted  you  away  into  a  clearer  atmos- 
70 


The  Crisis  of  Death  71 

phere  and  sent  you  searching  for  definite  revela* 
tions  of  God  about  other  people's  dead  thousands 
of  years  ago,  where  your  heart  and  affections 
were  not  involved,  and  where  cool,  clear  reason 
had  a  chance  to  be  heard.  We  tried  to  study 
impartially  what  Scripture  reveals  about  the 
World  of  the  Departed  and  how  the  primitive 
Church  interpreted  that  revelation.  This  gives 
us  a  solid  basis  to  proceed  on. 

§1 

With  that  preparation  we  come  back  into  the 
darkened  room  again  looking  into  the  face  of 
our  dead,  trying  in  perplexity  of  heart  to  fol 
low  him  on  the  great  journey.  To  avoid  con 
fusion  we  assume  here  that  he  died  a  penitent 
man  in  Christ's  faith  and  fear. 

Let  me  try  to  enter  into  your  thoughts.  Let 
me  begin  at  the  beginning — Death. 

Naturally  we  all  shrink  from  death — the 
seeming  shock  of  sundering  soul  and  body— 
the  launching  out  against  our  will  into  the  re 
gions  of  the  Unexplored — the  "  land  of  far  dis 
tances  "  as  Isaiah  calls  it.  We  are  afraid  of 
that  unknown  death,  for  our  dear  ones — like 
children  afraid  of  a  bogey  on  the  dark  stairs. 


72  The  Near  Hereafter 

We  can't  help  being  afraid  of  it.  But  ought 
we  to  be  so  MUCH  afraid  of  it  ?  Has  not  our 
Lord  taught  us  that  there  is  no  bogey  on  that 
dark  stairs,  that  he  who  has  just  now  closed 
his  eyes  in  death  is  opening  them  already  into  a 
larger  life  ? 

"  There  is  no  death,  what  seems  so  is  transition." 

Now  think  of  this  "  unknown  death."  Has 
not  Christ  revealed  to  you  that  this  terrible 
thing  that  you  so  fear  for  him  who  is  gone 
really  only  means  that  at  the  close  of  this  poor 
limited  kindergarten  stage  of  his  history  Death 
has  come — God's  beneficent  angel  to  lead  him 
into  the  next  stage  of  being.  Why  should  you 
be  afraid  ?  Birth  gave  him  much,  Death  will 
give  much  more.  FOR  DEATH  MEANS  BIETH 
INTO  A  FULLER  LIFE.  What  a  fright  he  gives 
us,  this  good  angel  of  God !  We  do  not  trust 
his  Master  much. 

Do  you  say  that  you  do  not  know  what  is  be 
fore  your  friend — that  it  is  a  "  leap  off  into  the 
dark  "  ?  Have  we  not  learned  from  Scripture 
already  that  it  is  much  less  of  "  dark  "  than 
some  of  us  thought  ?  And  may  it  not  be  much 


The  Crisis  of  Death  73 

less  of  a  "  leap  off  "  than  we  think — only  a 
closing  of  the  eyes  here  and  an  opening  of  them 
there  ?  May  not  the  birth  into  that  life  be  as 
simple  as  the  birth  into  this?  May  not  our 
fright  be  like  that  of  Don  Quixote  when  blind-  ! 
folded  he  hung  by  his  wrist  from  the  stable 
window  and  they  told  him  that  a  tremendous 
abyss  yawned  beneath  him.  He  is  in  terror  of 
the  awful  fall.  Maritornes  cuts  the  thong  with 
gladsome  laughter  and  the  gallant  gentleman 
falls — just  four  inches!  May  we  not  believe 
that  God  reserves  just  as  blithesome  a  surprise 
for  us  when  our  time  comes  to  discover  the 
simplicity,  the  agreeableness,  the  absence  of 
any  serious  change  in  what  we  call  dying.  I 
am  not  ignoring  the  pain  and  sickness  of  the 
usual  death-bed.  But  these  are  not  dying  ?  The 
act  of  dying  comes  after  these.  These  are  but 
the  birth  pangs  before  the  new  life  begins,  the 
rough,  hard  bit  of  road  that  leads  to  "the 
wicket  gate  out  of  the  city." 

Pliny,  from  much  clinical  observations,  de-  • 
clares  his  opinion  that  death  itself  is  pleasure 
rather  than  pain.     Dr.  Solander  was  delighted 
at  the  sensation  of  dying  in  the  snow.     The 
late  Archbishop  of  Canterbury  remarked  as  he 


74  The  Near  Hereafter 

died:  "It  is  really  nothing  much  after  all." 
Dying  itself  may  be  pleasure  rather  than  pain. 

We  have  all  noticed  that  expression  of  com 
posed  calm  which  comes  on  the  faces  of  the 
newly  dead.  Some  say  it  is  only  due  to  mus 
cular  relaxation.  Perhaps  so.  But  perhaps 
not.  One  likes  to  think  that  it  may  be  some 
thing  more.  Who  knows  that  it  may  not  be  a 
last  message  of  content  and  acquiescence  from 
those  departing  souls  who  at  the  moment  of 
departure  know  perhaps  a  little  more  than  our 
selves — a  message  of  good  cheer  and  pleasant 
promise  by  no  means  to  be  disregarded.1 

At  any  rate  does  not  Scripture  suggest  to  us 
in  the  story  of  Lazarus — of  Moses  and  Elias  at 
the  Transfiguration — of  the  dying  thief— of  the 
spirits  in  the  Unseen  Life  whom  Christ  visited 
at  His  death — that  Death  comes  not  as  an 
executioner  to  cut  off  our  departed  one  from 
life  and  love,  but  rather  as  God's  good  angel 
bringing  him  more  than  life  has  ever  brought, 
and  leading  him  by  a  path  as  full  of  miracles  of 
soft  arrangement  as  was  his  birth  to  heights  of 
ever  advancing  existence. 

1 1  have  here  freely  adapted  some  thoughts  and  phrases 
from  Edwin  Arnold's  Death  and  Afterwards. 


The  Crisis  of  Death  75 

§2 

God  reveals  to  us  too  that  the  closing  of  the 
eyes  in  the  darkness  of  Death  is  but  the  open 
ing  them  to  the  light  of  a  larger  life,  to  the 
vision  of  the  new  mysterious  real  world  which 
the  glare  of  this  world  obscured.  It  is  just 
what  happens  every  day  when  the  glare  of  the 
sunlight,  revealing  to  us  every  little  flower  and 
leaf  and  insect,  shuts  out  from  us  the  great 
universe  of  God  which  stands  forth  in  the  mid 
night  sky.  Do  you  know  Blanco  White's 
famous  sonnet  ?  He  is  imagining  what  Adam 
must  have  felt  as  the  first  night  fell  on  the 
earth.  All  the  beautiful  world  that  he  had 
known  for  but  a  day  was  vanishing  from  him 
into  darkness.  Was  the  end  of  all  things  come 
already  ?  But  lo,  a  stupendous  unexpected 
miracle !  Lo,  as  the  darkness  deepened  a  new 
and  more  wonderful  world  was  revealed  in  the 
sky,  a  world  which  the  sunlight  had  kept 
absolutely  concealed : 

Hesperus,  with  the  host  of  heaven  came 
And  lo  !  Creation  widened  on  man's  view 
Who  could  have  thought  such  marvels  lay  con 
cealed 
Behind  thy  beams,  O  Sun  ?    Or  who  could  find 


76  The  Near  Hereafter 

Whilst  flower  and  leaf  and  insect  stood  revealed 
That  to  such  countless  orbs  thou  raadest  us  blind  f 
Why  do  we  then  shun  Death  with  anxious  strife 
If  Light  can  thus  deceive,  wherefore  not  Life  ? 


Yes,  life  shuts  out  greater  things  than  light 
does.  God  teaches  us  that  Death  is  birth,  that 
what  the  earth  life  conceals  Death  will  reveal ; 
that  as  the  babe's  eyes  opened  from  the  dark 
ness  of  the  womb  to  sunlight  on  this  earth,  so 
will  the  eyes  that  close  in  the  darkness  of  death 
open  on  "a  light  that  never  was  on  sea  or 
land." 

§O 
o 

And  may  not  this  act  of  dying  be  much  less 
lonely  than  we  think?  God  sent  each  of  us 
into  this  first  stage  of  existence  with  mother 
and  home  and  loved  friends  about  us.  No  one 
comes  into  this  world  to  loneliness.  Should  not 
that  stir  some  hope  at  least  that  the  Father 
may  take  similar  care  for  us  in  our  entry  on  the 
second  stage  at  death  ?  I  hate  sentimentalizing 
about  it.  But  this  is  not  sentimentalizing.  I 
have  already  called  attention  to  our  Lord's  only 
account  of  a  good  man's  entrance  into  the  Un- 


The  Crisis  of  Death  77 

seen.  "  He  was  carried  by  the  angels,"  He 
said,  and  I  have  shown  you  some  reason  to 
think  that  He  meant  literally  what  He  said — 
that  the  angels  who  are  presented  in  Scripture 
as  so  interested  in  our  life  here  are  equally  in 
terested  in  our  transition  to  a  larger  life — that 
loving  watchers  are  around  a  soul  as  it  passes 
into  the  Unseen. 

I  sometimes  wonder,  too,  how  much  signifi 
cance  should  be  attached  to  the  fairly  frequent 
phenomenon  of  dying  people  seeming  in  some 
rapt  vision  to  see  or  feel  as  if  meeting  them  the 
presence  of  loved  ones  gone  before.  Sometimes 
these  phenomena  are  very  striking.  I  once 
thought  of  asking  a  religious  journal  to  open 
its  columns  to  testimony  from  thoughtful,  cool- 
headed  clergy  and  laity  of  such  experiences  at 
death-beds.  It  might  enable  us  to  judge  crit 
ically  if  it  could  be  explained  away  as  mere 
sentimental  fancy  or  if  the  evidence  were 
strong  enough  to  suggest  an  underlying  reality. 
It  would  need  to  be  very  keenly  criticized.  All 
allowance  should  be  made,  especially  in  the 
case  of  women,  for  the  deceitfulness  of  pious 
fancies.  But  there  are  some  cases  which,  if 
their  number  were  large  enough,  would  point 


78  The  Near  Hereafter 

much  deeper,  where  there  could  be  no  case  of 
sentimental  fancies.  For  instance  a  young  stu 
dent  in  one  of  our  city  hospitals  told  me  a  curi 
ous  experience  lately.  A  little  child  under  two 
years  old  had  been  rescued  out  of  a  fire  and 
was  dying  badly  burned.  "  I  took  the  little 
chap  on  a  pillow  in  my  arms,"  he  said,  "  to  let 
him  die  more  easily.  Suddenly  he  stiffened 
himself  and  reached  out  his  little  hands  and  his 
face  beamed  with  the  sort  of  gladness  that  a 
child  has  in  reaching  to  something  very  pleas 
ant  and  in  a  very  short  time  he  died."  My  in 
formant  was  by  no  manner  of  means  a  senti 
mental  youth,  and  he  was  much  struck  with 
the  incident.  I  don't  know  if  there  is  much 
evidence  of  this  kind.  If  so  it  would  count  for 
a  good  deal  in  forming  our  judgment.  Our 
Lord  speaks  of  those  whom  we  have  made 
friends  on  earth  receiving  us  when  we  die  into 
the  everlasting  habitations  (Luke  xvi.  9).  Is  it 
too  good  to  believe  that  He  might  have  meant 
some  pleasant  welcoming  on  the  other  side — 
that  perhaps  that  little  child  in  the  hospital 
that  night  was  really  reaching  out  his  little 
hands  to  some  one  invisible  to  the  young  stu 
dent  ?  Let  us  have  no  weak  sentimentalizing, 


The  Crisis  of  Death  79 

but  on  the  other  hand — is  anything  too 
good  to  believe  as  to  what  God  might  do  for 
poor  frightened  souls  at  such  a  dread  crisis  of 
being? 


CHAPTER  YI 
"I,"   " MYSELF"  AFTER  DEATH 

§-| 
J^ 

BUT  we  must  not  delay  at  Death.     Death 
is  a  very  small  thing  in  comparison  with 
what  conies  after  it — that  wonderful, 
wonderful,  wonderful  world  into  which  Death 
ushers  us.     Turn  away  from  the  face  of  your 
dead.     Turn   away  from   the    house    of  clay 
which  held  him  an  hour  ago.     The  house  is 
empty,  the  tenant  is  gone.     He  is  away  already, 
gasping  in  the  unutterable  wonder  of  the  new 
experience. 

O  change  !  stupendous  change  I 
There  lies  the  soulless  clod. 
The  light  eternal  breaks, 
The  new  immortal  wakes, 
Wakes  with  his  God ! 

Oh  !  the  wonder  of  it  'to  him  at  first !  Years 
ago  I  met  with  a  story  in  a  sermon  by  Canon 
Liddon.  An  old  Indian  officer  was  telling  of 
his  battles — of  the  Indian  Mutiny,  of  the  most 
striking  events  in  his  professional  career ;  and 
80 


"I"  "Myself"  After  Death         81 

as  he  vividly  described  the  skirmishes,  and  bat-  x\ 
ties,  and  sieges,  and  hair-breadth  escapes,  his  au 
dience  hung  breathless  in  sympathy  and  excite 
ment.  At  last  he  paused ;  and  to  their  expres 
sions  of  wonderment  he  quietly  replied,  "I 
expect  to  see  something  much  more  wonderful 
than  that."  As  he  was  over  seventy,  and  re 
tired  from  the  service,  his  listeners  looked  up 
into  his  face  with  surprise.  There  was  a  pause ; 
and  then  he  said,  in  a  solemn  undertone,  "I 
mean  in  the  first  five  minutes  after  death." 

That  story  caught  on  to  me  instantly.  That 
has  been  for  years  my  closest  feeling.  I  feel  it 
at  every  death-bed  as  the  soul  passes  through. 
I  believe  it  will  be  my  strongest  feeling  when 
my  own  death-hour  comes — eager,  intense,  glad 
curiosity  about  the  new,  strange  world  opening 
before  me. 

Not  long  ago  in  the  early  morning  I  stood 
by  a  poor  old  man  as  he  was  going  through 
into  the  Unseen.  He  was,  as  it  were,  fumbling 
with  the  veil  of  that  silent  land — wishing  to  get 
through ;  and  we  were  talking  together  of  the 
unutterable  wonder  and  mystery  that  was  only 
an  hour  or  two  ahead.  I  always  talk  to  dying 
people  of  the  wonders  of  that  world  just  ahead 


82  The  Near  Hereafter 

of  them.  I  left  him  and  returned  to  see  him 
in  a  couple  of  hours ;  but  I  was  too  late,  he  had 
just  got  through — got  through  into  that  wonder 
and  mystery  that  I  had  been  stupidly  guessing 
about,  and  the  poor  old  worn  body  was  flung 
dishevelled  on  the  bed,  as  one  might  fling  an 
old  coat,  to  be  ready  for  the  journey.  He  was 
gone.  Just  got  through — and  I  felt,  with  al 
most  a  gasp,  that  he  had  solved  the  riddle  of 
life  ;  that  I  would  give  anything,  risk  anything, 
for  one  little  glimpse  through ;  but  I  could  not 
get  it.  I  could  only  guess  the  stupendous  thing 
that  had  come  to  him.  For  all  the  stupendous 
changes  that  have  ever  happened  here  are 
surely  but  trifles  when  compared  with  that 
first  few  minutes  in  the  marvellous  life  beyond, 
when  our  friends  pass  from  us  within  the 
veil,  and  our  hearts  follow  them  with  eager 
questioning — "What  are  they  doing?  What 
are  they  seeing?  What  are  they  knowing 
now?" 


More  and  more  of  late  years  I  keep  asking 
those  questions  at  death-beds.  I  seem  to  myself 
constantly  as  if  trying  to  hold  back  the  curtain 


"I"  "Myself"  After  Death         83 

and  look  through.  But  the  look  through  is  all 
blurred  and  indistinct. 

It  must  always  be  so  while  we  are  here,  with 
our  limited  faculties,  shut  up  in  this  little  earth 
body.  I  know  certain  facts  about  the  "  I,"  the 
"  self  "  in  the  Unseen  Life,  but  I  have  no  knowl 
edge  and  no  experience  that  would  help  me  to 
picture  his  surroundings.  I  cannot  form  any 
image,  any,  even  the  vaguest,  conception  of 
what  that  life  appears  like.  That  is  why  my 
outlook  is  so  blurred  and  indistinct. 

And  this  brings  me  to  point  out  WHAT  SOBT 

OF  KNOWLEDGE  WE  CAN  HAVE  AND  WHAT 
SOKT  OF  KNOWLEDGE  WE  CANNOT  HAVE  about 

that  life.  It  may  help  you  not  to  expect  the 
impossible. 

You  desire  to  know  two  things  about  the 
Unseen  World. 

1st.  You  desire  to  know  the  real  life  of  the 
"  I "  himself — consciousness,  thought,  memory, 
love,  happiness,  penitence  and  such  like. 

2nd.  You  desire  to  know  his  outward  sur 
rounding,  so  that  you  can  picture  to  yourself 
his  life  in  that  world.  That  is  what  gives  the 
interesting  touch  to  your  knowledge  of  your 
friend's  life  in  a  foreign  land  on  earth. 


84  The  Near  Hereafter 

Now  the  first  of  these  is  the  really  important 
knowledge,  and  such  knowledge  you  can  have 
and  you  can  understand  because  it  is  of  the 
same  kind  as  the  knowledge  you  already  have 
of  him  on  earth. 

The  second  would  be  an  interesting  knowl 
edge,  but  this  knowledge  you  cannot  have,  be 
cause  you  have  no  faculties  for  it  and  no  sim 
ilar  experience  to  help  you  to  realize  it.  It  is 
a  law  of  all  human  knowledge  that  you  cannot 
know  and  cannot  depict  to  yourself  anything  of 
which  you  have  had  no  corresponding  experi 
ence  before. 

"  I,"  "  myself  "  which  goes  into  the  Unseen  is 
the  really  important  matter,  not  my  surround 
ings.  And  the  essential  knowledge,  I  say,  about 
that  self,  about  his  inner  real  life  in  the  Unseen 
you  can  have  and  you  can  understand  because 
the  inner  life  there  is  of  the  very  same  kind  as 
the  inner  life  here.  If  I  am  told  of  full  con 
sciousness  there,  of  memory  there,  of  love  or 
hatred  there,  of  happiness  or  pain  there,  of  joy 
or  sorrow  there,  I  can  easily  understand  it.  I 
have  had  experience  of  the  like  here.  There 
is  no  difficulty. 

But  the  knowledge  of  the  outward  environ 


"  I  "  "  Myself  "  After  Death         85 

ment  there — what  we  shall  be  like,  how  that 
world  will  appear,  how  we  shall  live  and  move 
and  have  our  being  in  a  spiritual  existence — all 
that  deeply  interesting  knowledge  which  im 
agination  could  use  to  picture  that  life  and 
bring  it  before  us — THAT  we  cannot  have.  It 
is  not  possible  with  our  limited  faculties  and 
limited  experience.  We  could  not  be  taught  it 
We  have  no  faculties  to  take  it  in  and  no  expe 
rience  to  aid  us  in  realizing  it.  A  blind  man 
cannot  picture  colours  to  himself,  a  deaf  man 
cannot  imagine  music.  It  is  not  that  we 
are  unwilling  to  teach  him,  but  that  his 
limited  faculties  prevent  him  from  taking  in 
the  idea. 

Kealize  your  position  then  with  regard  to 
the  spiritual  world.  Imagine  a  population  of 
blind,  deaf  men  inhabiting  this  earth.  One  of " 
them  suddenly  gets  his  sight  and  hearing,  and 
lo !  in  a  moment  an  unutterable  glory,  a  whole 
world  of  beautiful  colours  and  forms  and 
music  has  flowed  into  his  life.  But  he  cannot 
convey  any  notion  of  it  to  his  former  com 
panions.  He  cannot  convey  to  them  the  slight 
est  idea  of  the  lovely  sunset  or  the  music  of 
the  birds.  We,  shut  up  in  these  human  bodies, 


86  The  Near  Hereafter 

are  the  blind,  deaf  men  in  God's  glorious 
universe.  Some  of  our  comrades  have  moved 
into  the  new  life  beyond,  where  the  eyes  of  the 
blind  are  opened  and  the  ears  of  the  deaf  are 
unstopped.  But  we  have  no  power  of  even 
imagining  what  their  wondrous  experience  is 
like. 

I  suppose  that  is  the  reason  why  we  have  no 
description  of  Paradise  or  Heaven  except  in 
earthly  imagery  of  golden  streets  and  gates  of 
pearl.  I  suppose  that  is  why  St.  Paul  could  not 
utter  what  he  saw  when  in  some  tranced  con 
dition  he  was  caught  up  into  Paradise  and  that 
life  was  shown  to  him — "  whether  in  the  body 
or  out  of  the  body,"  he  could  not  tell  (2  Cor. 
xii.  4).  I  suppose  that  was  why  Lazarus  could 
tell  nothing  of  these  marvellous  four  days  in 
which  his  disembodied  spirit  mingled  with  the 
spirits  of  the  departed. 

"  '  Where  wert  tfiou,  brother,  those  four  days? ' 
There  lives  no  record  of  reply, 
Which,  telling  what  it  is  to  die, 
Had  surely  added  praise  to  praise. " 

I  suppose  it  was  all  unintelligible  to  mortal 
ken  when  the  spirit  had  come  back  to  the  body 


"  I  "  "  Myself  "  After  Death         87 

it  bad  left.  If,  in  a  crowd  of  blind  deaf  men, 
one  got  his  sight  and  hearing  for  a  few  minutes, 
and  then  relapsed,  what  could  he  tell  to  his 
comrades  or  even  fully  realize  to  himself  ? 

Thus  you  see  the  knowledge  that  you  can 
have  and  the  knowledge  you  cannot  have  of 
that  spirit  life.  Be  content.  God  has  given 
you  a  great  deal  of  knowledge  of  that  real  life 
of  the  self  in  the  hereafter.  If  He  has  so  made 
you  that  the  other  knowledge  that  would  help 
you  to  picture  the  surroundings  is  impossible  to 
you  it  is  best  that  you  should  know  it.  Be  con 
tent.  Don't  cry  for  the  moon.  Follow  your 
departed  in  thought  into  that  life  and  realize 
what  you  have  learned  from  Scripture  about 
him. 

II 

What  have  you  learned  ? 

First  that  IT  is  A  VIVID  CONSCIOUS  life  into 
which  he  has  gone. 

There  are  several  passages  in  Scripture  which 
speak  of  Death  as  sleep  and  which  taken  alone 
might  suggest  a  long  unconsciousness,  a  sort  of 
Rip  Yan  Winkle  life,  sleeping  for  thousands  of 
years  and  waking  up  in  a  moment  at  the  Judg- 


88  The  Near  Hereafter 

ment  Day,  feeling  as  if  there  had  been  no  in 
terval  between.  But  a  little  thought  will  show 
it  is  a  mere  figure  of  speech  taken  from  the 
sleeping  appearance  of  the  body.  "The  sleep 
of  Death  "  is  a  very  natural  expression  to  use 
as  one  looks  on  the  calm,  peaceful  face  after 
life's  fitful  fever  and  the  long  pain  and  sick 
ness  of  the  death-bed.  But  no  one  can  study 
the  Bible  references  to  the  life  beyond  without 
seeing  that  it  cannot  be  a  life  of  sleep  or  un 
consciousness.  "  Shall  we  sleep  between  Death 
and  the  Judgment  ?  "  asks  Tertullian.  "  Why 
souls  do  not  sleep  even  when  men  are  alive. 
It  is  the  province  of  bodies  to  sleep."  This 
sleep  theory  has  always  been  condemned  when 
ever  the  Church  has  pronounced  on  it.  Even 
the  Keformers  declare  it  at  variance  with  Holy 
Scripture  in  spite  of  the  strong  feeling  in  its 
favour  in  their  day.1 

The  reader  who  has  followed  thus  far  will 
need  no  proof  as  to  the  teaching  of  Scripture 
that  the  "Waiting  Life  before  the  Judgment  into 

1  Our  ' '  39  Articles  ' '  were  originally  42,  and  the  40th  says, 
"They  which  say  that  the  souls  of  those  who  depart  hence 
do  sleep  being  without  all  sense,  feeling  or  perceiving  till 
the  Day  of  Judgment  ...  do  utterly  dissent  from  the 
right  belief  declared  to  us  in  Holy  Scripture." 


"  I  "  "  Myself  "  After  Death         89 

which  our  dear  ones  have  gone  is  no  uncon 
scious  sleep  but  a  real  vivid  conscious  life.  So 
vivid  that  our  Lord's  spirit  is  said  to  have  been 
quickened,  made  more  alive,  as  He  passed  in. 
So  vivid  that  the  men  of  the  old  world  could 
listen  to  His  preaching.  So  vivid  that  Moses 
and  Elias — those  eager,  impetuous  leaders — in 
that  wondrous  life  could  not  be  held  by  its 
bonds,  but  broke  through  to  stand  on  the 
mountain  with  Christ  a  thousand  years  after 
their  death.  So  vivid  that  Lazarus  (whom  our 
Lord  describes  as  in  Abraham's  bosom)  is 
depicted  as  living  a  full,  clear,  intelligent  life  ; 
and  Dives  as  thinking  anxiously  about  his  five 
brothers  on  earth. 

That  was  surely  no  unconscious  life  which 
St.  Paul  saw  when  he  was  caught  up  into 
Paradise  and  heard  unspeakable  things,  nor 
was  it  a  blank  unconsciousness  that  he  looked 
for  in  his  desire  "  to  depart  and  be  with  Christ 
which  is  far  better  "  (Phil.  i.  23). 

Do  you  want  further  proof?  Look  at  our 
Lord  and  the  thief  on  the  cross.  The  two  men 
had  been  hanging  together  dying  on  the  cross, 
just  about  to  get  through  the  veil  to  the  world 
beyond.  The  poor  thief  did  not  know  what 


90  The  Near  Hereafter 

was  beyond  that  veil — darkness,  insensibility, 
stupor,  oblivion.  The  only  one  on  earth  who 
did  know  hung  there  beside  him.  And  when 
the  poor  dying  one  turned  with  the  words, 
"Lord,  remember  me  when  Thou  conaest  in 
Thy  kingdom,"  He  promptly  replied,  "  To-day 
thou  shalt  be  with  Me."  If  any  one  knew, 
surely  He  knew.  If  it  meant  anything,  it 
meant,  "  There  shall  be  no  oblivion,  no  uncon 
scious  sleeping.  To-night,  when  our  dead 
bodies  lie  here  upon  the  cross,  you  and  I  shall 
live  and  know  each  other  as  the  two  men  who 
hung  dying  together  on  Calvary."  Ah !  the 
wonder  to  him  as  he  went  in  beyond  the  veil, 
as  though  the  Lord  would  lead  him,  lest  he 
should  be  afraid. 

Beyond  all  question  God  has  revealed  to  you 
plainly  enough  that  your  beloved  has  gone  into 
a  full,  vivid,  conscious  life.  He  is  more  alive 
to-day  than  he  ever  was  on  earth. 


What  follows  ?  This.  If  I  am  fully  con 
scious  what  am  I  conscious  of?  Surely,  first 
of  all  I  must  be  conscious  of  myself,  conscious 
of  the  continuity  of  my  personal  identity,  con- 


"I"  "  Myself  "  After  Death        91 

scious  of  the  continuity  of  my  personal  char 
acter.  I  must  feel  that  I  am  the  same  "  I,"  I 
am  still  "  myself."  Death  which  removes  only 
the  outer  covering  leaves  the  Ego  just  where  it 
was.  No  better.  No  worse.  The  Bible  lays 
no  emphasis  at  all  on  death  as  making  any 
change  in  character.  Our  Lord  assumes  the 
characters  as  remaining  the  same.  The  mere  \  \ 
act  of  dying  does  not  alter  character.  I  am 
the  same  I.  I  have  entered  into  a  new  en 
vironment  more  favourable  for  the  exercise  of 
my  faculties,  more  adaptable  to  the  acquisition 
of  knowledge,  more  helpful,  I  trust,  to  growth 
in  good.  But  I  am  the  same  "  I."  As  I  leave 
off  here  I  begin  there.  I  take  into  that  world 
just  myself  as  I  have  made  it.  If  I  have  made 
the  best  of  myself  what  more  should  I  desire 
to  take  ?  Consciousness,  Memory,  Thought, 
Love,  Character.  If  I  have  not  made  the  best 
of  myself,  if  I  have  acquired  a  distaste  for  God, 
for  holiness,  still  I  take  in  myself  just  as  I 
stand.  Think  how  tremendously  solemn  that 
makes  the  life  here.  It  is  the  place  of  char 
acter  making  for  the  life  there.  I  can  never, 
never,  never  get  away  from  myself.  I  shall 
always  be  myself.  You  remember  what  our 


92  The  Near  Hereafter 

Lord  said  from  the  other  side  of  the  .grave. 
"  Handle  Me  and  see  it  is  I  MYSELF." 

It  is  I  myself,  the  very  same  self.  It  is  they 
themselves,  the  very  same  selves  whom  I  loved 
and  who  loved  me  so  dearly.  In  that  solemn 
hour  after  death,  believe  it,  your  boy,  your 
wife,  your  husband,  who  is  experiencing  the 
startling  revelations  of  the  new  life  is  feeling 
that  life  as  an  unbroken  continuance  of  the  life 
begun  on  earth.  Only  the  environment  is 
changed.  He  feels  himself  the  same  boy  or 
man  that  he  was  an  hour  ago,  with  the  same 
character,  aspirations,  desires,  the  same  love 
and  courage  and  hope.  But  oh,  what  a  differ 
ent  view  of  all  things  !  How  clearly  he  recog 
nizes  God's  love  and  holiness.  How  clearly  he 
sees  himself — his  whole  past  life.  If  ever  he 
cared  for  Christ  and  His  will,  how  longingly, 
wonderingly,  he  is  reaching  out  to  Him.  If 
ever  he  loved  you  tenderly  on  earth,  how 
deeply  and  tenderly  he  is  loving  you  to-day.  In 
all  the  whirl  of  awe  and  wonder  and  curiosity 
and  hope,  love  must  stand  supreme.  For  "  love 
never  faileth."  "  And  now,"  says  St.  Paul, 
"  abideth  Faith,  Hope  and  Love  (these  three  that 
abide  for  ever),  but  the  greatest  of  these  is  love." 


"  I  "  "  Myself  "  After  Death        93 

§3 

What  else  have  you  learned  ?  That  HE  RE 
MEMBERS  CLEARLY  the  old  life  and  the  old 
home  and  the  old  comrades  and  the  old  scenes 
on  earth.  There  is  no  conjecturing  about  that. 
That  goes  without  saying  if  "  I  "  am  the  same 
"  I  "  in  that  world.  Personal  identity  of  course 
postulates  memory  which  binds  into  one  the 
old  life  and  the  new.  And  the  Bible  takes  that 
for  granted.  We  saw  that  Lazarus  remembered 
Dives  and  Dives  remembered  Lazarus  and  re 
membered  his  old  home  and  the  five  young 
brothers  who  grew  up  with  him.  He  remembers 
that  they  have  grown  to  be  selfish  men  like 
himself  and  is  troubled  for  them.  And  Abra 
ham  assumes  it  as  a  matter  of  course.  "  My 
son,  remember  that  thou  in  thy  lifetime,"  etc. 
Our  Lord  comes  back  from  Death  remembering 
all  the  past  as  if  Death  made  no  chasm  at  all 
in  His  memory.  "  Go  and  meet  Me  in  Galilee," 
He  says ;  "  Lo  I  have  told  you  "  (before  I  died). 
And  the  redeemed  in  the  future  life  are 
represented  as  remembering  and  praising  God 
who  had  redeemed  them  from  their  sins  on 
earth. 

So  you  may  be  quite  sure  that  your  dear 


94  The  Near  Hereafter 

one  is  remembering  you  and  storing  up  in  his 
memory  all  your  love  in  the  past.  Did  your 
wife  ever  tell  you  on  earth  how  happy  you  had 
made  her  ?  Did  the  old  father  and  mother 
now  in  the  Unseen  ever  thank  God  for  the 
comfort  you  had  been  to  them  during  their  de 
clining  years  ?  Be  sure  that  in  that  land  of 
love  these  will  be  amongst  the  most  precious 
pictures  in  their  storehouse  of  memory. 


And  he  has  taken  with  him  all  the  treasures 
of  mind  and  soul  which  by  God's  grace  he  has 
won  for  himself  on  earth.  A  man  can  take 
nothing  of  the  external  things  —  of  gold  or 
lands.  Nothing  of  what  he  HAS  but  all  of 
what  he  is  —  all  that  he  has  gained  IN  HIMSELF. 
The  treasures  of  memory,  of  disciplined  powers, 
of  enlarged  capacities,  of  a  pure  and  loving 
heart.  All  the  enrichment  of  the  mind  by 
study,  all  the  love  of  man,  all  the  love  of  God, 
all  the  ennobling  of  character  which  has  come 
through  the  struggle  after  right  and  duty, 
These  are  the  true  treasures  which  go  on  with 
us  into  that  land  where  neither  rust  nor  moth 
doth  corrupt. 


"I"  "Myself"  After  Death         95 

§5 

And  he  is  "  WITH  CHRIST." 

The  Bible  teaches  that  the  faithful  who  have 
died  in  Christ  are  happy  and  blest  in  Paradise 
even  though  the  Final  Heaven  and  the  Beatific 
Vision  is  still  but  a  thing  to  be  longed  for  far 
off  in  the  future.  Lazarus  is  "  comforted " 
after  his  hard  life  on  earth.  "  The  souls  of  the 
righteous  are  in  the  hands  of  God,  there  shall 
no  torment  touch  them."  "Blessed  are  the 
dead  which  die  in  the  Lord  .  .  .  they  rest 
from  their  labours."  But  best  of  all  it  assures 
us  that  they  are  WITH  CHRIST.  "  Lord  Jesus 
receive  my  spirit "  the  dying  Stephen  prayed 
as  he  passed  into  the  Unseen.  They  are  "  ab 
sent  from  the  body  at  home  with  the  Lord." 
They  "  depart  to  be  with  Christ  which  is  far 
better." 

"  With  Christ."  One  has  to  write  carefully 
here.  The  full  vision  of  the  Divine  Glory  and 
Goodness  and  Love  is  reserved  for  the  final 
stage  of  existence  in  Heaven  where  nothing 
that  defileth  shall  enter  in,  whereas  this  Inter 
mediate  Life  is  one  with  many  imperfections 
and  faults,  quite  unready  for  that  vision  of 
glory.  But  for  all  that  St.  Paul  believed  that 


96  The  Near  Hereafter 

the  presence  of  Christ  was  vouchsafed  in  that 
waiting  land,  in  some  such  way  we  may  sup 
pose  as  on  earth  long  ago.  Only  an  imperfect 
revelation  of  the  Son  of  God.  And  yet — and 
yet — oh,  how  one  longs  for  it !  Think  of  being 
near  Him,  even  in  some  such  relation  as  were 
the  disciples  long  ago. 

"  I  think  when  I  read  that  sweet  story  of  old, 

When  Jesus  was  here  amongst  men, 
How  He  called  little  children  as  lambs  to  Hi* 

fold, 
How  I  long  to  have  been  with  Him  then." 

'/es,  St.  Paul  seems  to  say  you  shall  be  with 
Him,  you  shall  have  that  longing  gratified  in 
some  measure  even  before  you  go  to  Heaven. 
So  that  Paradise,  poor  and  imperfect  as  it  is 
compared  with  the  Heaven  beyond,  is  surely  a 
state  to  be  greatly  desired.  Some  pages  back 
I  wrote  with  a  certain  shrinking  "  No  man  has 
ever  yet  gone  to  Heaven."  It  is  quite  true, 
and  yet  I  could  feel  some  poor  mourner  shrink 
ing  back  from  it  as  he  thought  of  that  beloved 
one  gone.  Nay,  shrink  not.  Paradise  means 
the  "  Park  "  of  God,  the  "  Garden  "  of  God,  the 
place  of  rest  and  peace  and  refreshing  shade. 


"I"  "Myself"  After  Death         97 

The  Park  is  not  the  Palace  but  it  is  the  pre 
cincts  of  the  Palace.  Paradise  is  not  Heaven, 
but  it  is  the  Courtyard  of  Heaven.  And  (the 
dearest,  tenderest  assurance  of  all)  they  are  with 
Christ.  Is  not  that  sufficient  answer  to  many 
questions?  At  any  rate  the  Bible  definitely 
teaches  that 


CHAPTEE  YII 

EECOGNITION 

§1 

SHALL  WE  KNOW  ONE  ANOTHER  IN  THAT 
LIFE?    Why    not?    As    George   Mac- 
donald     somewhere    pertinently     asks, 
"  Shall  we  be  greater  fools  in  Paradise  than  we 
are  here  ?  " 

This  is  a  perfectly  apt  retort,  and  not  at  all 
flippant  as  it  may  seem  at  first.  It  is  based  on 
the  belief  suggested  by  common  sense  and  con 
firmed  by  Scripture  that  our  life  there  will  be 
the  natural  continuous  development  of  our  life 
here  and  not  some  utterly  unconnected  exist 
ence.  If  consciousness,  personal  identity,  char 
acter,  love,  memory,  fellowship,  intercourse  go 
on  in  that  life  why  should  there  be  a  question 
raised  about  recognition  ?  True,  there  are  mor 
bid  times  with  most  of  us  when  we  are  inclined 
to  doubt  all  desirable  things,  and  there  are  some 
gloomy  Christians  who  are  always  suspicious  of 
anything  especially  bright  and  hopeful  in  the 
Gospel  of  Christ.  But  to  the  normal  Christian 
98 


Recognition  99 

man  who  knows  what  is  revealed  and  who  be 
lieves  in  the  love  of  God,  there  should  never  be 
any  serious  doubt  about  recognition  in  that 
life. 

§2 

Before  saying  anything  about  Scripture  evi 
dence  let  rue  point  out  that  there  are  some  things 
that  are  always  assumed  by  legitimate  inference 
even  without  any  definite  proofs.  If  I  knew 
that  the  inhabitants  of  Mars  were  alive,  and  in 
full  consciousness,  and  with  souls  like  mine,  and 
capable  of  intercourse  with  each  other — whether 
they  have  bodies  or  not,  I  should  assume  that 
they  knew  one  another,  I  should  not  wait  for 
that  fact  to  be  definitely  stated  by  a  visitor  to 
Mars  who  should  return  to  earth.  I  should  as 
sume  it  without  his  stating  it.  Nay,  I  should 
require  very  strong  evidence  to  make  me  be 
lieve  the  contrary.  Now,  the  Bible  says  that 
our  dear  ones  in  Paradise  are  alive, — that  their 
life  is  a  full  conscious  life,  with  full  conscious 
ness  of  personal  identity,  that  they  remember 
the  things  of  the  old  earth  life,  that  they  love 
one  another,  that  they  can  have  intercourse  to 
gether  as  in  the  story  of  Dives  and  Lazarus. 
So  far  as  we  can  judge,  the  inner  life  of  the 


loo  The  Near  Hereafter 

"  I "  THERE  seems  a  very  natural  continuation 
of  his  life  HERE. 

If  then,  "  I "  am  the  same  "  I,"  the  same  per 
son,  still  alive,  still  conscious,  still  thinking, 
still  remembering,  still  loving,  still  longing  for 
my  dear  ones,  still  capable  of  intercourse  with 
others,  why  may  I  not  without  definite  proof 
assume  the  fact  of  recognition?  Surely  it 
should  require  strong  evidence  to  make  me  be 
lieve  the  contrary.  It  is  one  thing  to  avoid 
reckless  assertions  without  any  foundation — it 
is  quite  another  thing  to  have  so  little  trust  in 
God  that  we  are  afraid  to  make  a  fair  inference 
such  as  we  would  unhesitatingly  make  in  like 
conditions  here — just  because  it  seems  to  us 
"  too  good  to  be  true."  Nothing  is  too  good  to 
be  true  where  God  is  concerned.  I  do  believe 
that  one  reason  why  we  have  not  definite  an 
swers  to  such  questions  as  this  is  because  such 
answers  ought  not  to  be  necessary  for  people 
who  trusted  fully  in  the  tenderness  of  the  love 
of  God. 

§3 

Why,  even  if  the  Bible  were  to  give  you  no 
hint  of  it,  do  you  not  see  that  the  deepest,  no 


Recognition  101 

blest  instincts  that  God  has  implanted  in  us  cry 
out  for  recognition  of  our  departed  ;  and  where 
God  is  concerned  it  is  not  too  much  to  say  that 
the  deepest,  noblest  instincts  are,  in  a  sense, 
prophecies.  This  passionate  affection,  the  no 
blest  thing  that  God  has  implanted  in  us,  makes 
it  impossible  to  believe  that  we  should  be  but 
solitary  isolated  spirits  amongst  a  crowd  of 
others  whom  we  did  not  know,  that  we  should 
live  in  the  society  of  happy  souls  hereafter  and 
never  know  that  the  spirit  next  us  was  that  of 
a  mother  or  husband  or  friend  or  child.  We 
know  that  the  Paradise  and  earth  lives  come 
from  the  same  God  who  is  the  same  always. 
Into  this  life  He  never  sends  us  alone.  There 
is  the  mother  love  waiting  and  the  family  af 
fection  around  us,  and  as  we  grow  older  love 
and  friendship  and  association  with  others  is 
one  of  the  great  needs  and  pleasures  of  life  and 
one  of  the  chief  means  of  training  the  higher 
side  of  us.  Unless  His  method  changes  we  may 
surely  hope  that  He  will  do  something  similar 
hereafter,  for  love  is  the  plant  that  must  overtop 
all  others  in  the  whole  Kingdom  of  God. 
Again,  love  and  friendship  must  be  LOVE 

AND   FEIENDSHIP   for  SOME  ONE.      If  W6  don't 


102  The  Near  Hereafter 

know  any  one,  then  we  cannot  love,  and  human 
love  must  die  without  an  object.  But  the  Bible 
makes  it  a  main  essential  of  the  religious  life 
that  "He  that  loveth  God  love  his  brother  also." 
If  we  shall  not  know  one  another,  why  then 
this  undying  memory  of  departed  ones,  this 
aching  void  that  is  never  filled  on  earth  ?  Alas 
for  us  !  For  we  are  worse  off  than  the  lower 
animals.  The  calf  is  taken  from  the  cow,  the 
kittens  are  taken  from  their  mother  and  in  a 
few  days  they  are  forgotten.  But  the  poor 
human  mother  never  forgets.  When  her  head 
is  bowed  with  age,  when  she  has  forgotten 
nearly  all  else  on  earth  you  can  bring  the  tears 
into  her  eyes  by  speaking  of  the  child  that  died 
in  her  arms  forty  years  ago.  Will  God  disap 
point  that  tender  love,  that  one  supreme  thing 
which  is  "  the  most  like  God  within  the  soul  "  ? 


There  can  be  no  real  reason,  I  repeat,  for 
doubting  the  fact  of  recognition  unless  the  Bible 
should  distinctly  state  the  contrary.  And  so 
far  from  doing  this  the  Bible,  in  its  very  few 
references  to  the  Hereafter  life,  always  assumes 
the  fact  and  never  in  any  way  contradicts  it. 


Recognition  1 03 

Kotice  first  the  curiously  persistent  formula 
in  which  Old  Testament  chroniclers  speak  of 
death.  "  He  died  in  a  good  old  age  and  WAS 
GATHERED  UNTO  HIS  PEOPLE  and  they  buried 
him."  "  Gathered  unto  his  people  "  can  hardly 
mean  burial  with  his  people,  for  the  burial  is 
mentioned  after  it.  It  comes  between  the  dying 
and  the  burial.  And  I  note  that  even  at  Moses' 
burial  on  the  lone  mountain  top  this  phrase  is 
solemnly  used.  "  The  Lord  said  unto  him  get 
thee  up  into  the  mount  and  die  in  the  mount 

AND  BE  GATHERED  TO  THY  PEOPLE."      Miriam 

was  buried  in  the  distant  desert,  Aaron's  body 
lay  on  the  slopes  of  Mount  Hor,  and  the  wise 
little  mother  who  made  the  ark  of  bulrushes 
long  ago  had  found  a  grave,  I  suppose,  in  the 
brick-fields  of  Egypt.  Did  it  mean  that  he 
came  back  to  them  all  in  the  life  unseen  when 
he  was  "  gathered  to  his  people  "  ? 

David  seemed  to  think  that  he  would  know 
his  dead  child.  "  I  shall  go  to  him  but  he  shall 
not  return  to  me." 

Our  Lord  assumes  that  Dives  and  Lazarus 
knew  each  other.  And  in  another  passage  He 
uses  a  very  homely  illustration  of  a  friendly 
gathering  when  He  speaks  of  those  who  shall 


104  The  Near  Hereafter 

"  sit  down  with  Abraham  and  Isaac  and  Jacob 
in  the  Kingdom."  And  again  in  His  advice 
about  the  right  use  of  riches.  "  Make  to  your 
selves  friends  by  the  means  of  the  mammon  of 
unrighteousness  that  when  ye  die  they  may  re 
ceive  you  into  the  everlasting  habitations" 
(Luke  xvi.  9).  Surely,  that  at  least  suggests 
recognition  and  a  pleasant  welcoming  on  the 
other  side. 

I  remember  well,  how  in  the  pain  of  a  great 
bereavement,  His  words  to  the  penitent  thief 
came  into  my  life  like  a  message  from  the  Be 
yond.  "  To-day  thou  shalt  be  with  Me  in  Par 
adise."  I  put  myself  in  the  place  of  that  poor 
friendless  man  taking  his  lonely  leap  off  into 
the  dark  and  felt  what  a  joy  and  comfort  it 
must  have  been.  "  To-day  we  shall  be  together 
again  at  the  other  side."  JSTot,  "  I  will  remem 
ber  thee,"  but,  "Thou  shalt  be  with  Me." 
Not,  by  and  by  when  I  come  in  My  Kingdom, 
but  "  To-day."  If  anybody  knew,  surely  Jesus 
knew.  If  His  words  meant  anything  surely 
they  meant  we  shall  be  conscious  of  each 
other,  we  shall  know  each  other  as  the  two 
friendless  ones  who  hung  on  the  cross  to 
gether, 


Recognition  105 

Then  I  see  St.  Paul  (though  he  is  referring 
to  the  later  stage  of  existence)  comforting  be 
reaved  mourners  with  the  thought  of  meeting 
those  whom  Christ  shall  bring  with  Him. 
Where  would  be  the  comfort  of  it  if  they 
should  not  know  them  ?  He  expects  to  meet 
his  converts  and  present  them  to  Christ.  How 
could  he  say  this  if  he  thought  He  would  not 
know  them? 

I  wonder  if  anybody  really  doubts  it  after 
all.  Just  think  of  it !  With  Christ  in  Para 
dise  and  not  knowing  or  loving  any  comrade 
soul !  Is  that  possible  in  the  land  of  love  ? 
With  our  dear  ones  in  Paradise  and  never  a 
thrill  of  recognition  as  we  touch  in  spiritual  in 
tercourse  the  mother,  or  wife,  or  husband,  or 
child  for  whose  presence  we  are  longing !  Can 
not  you  imagine  our  wondering  joy  when  our 
questionings  are  set  at  rest  ?  Cannot  you  im 
agine  the  Lord  in  His  tender  reproach,  "  Oh, 
thou  of  little  faith,  wherefore  didst  thou 
doubt  ?  " 

§5 

Sometimes  one  vaguely  wonders,  How  can 
there  be  spiritual  recognition  ?  How  shall  we 


106  The  Near  Hereafter 

recognize  each  other  without  this  accustomed 
bodily  shape  ?  And  in  the  effort  to  realize  the 
fact  of  recognition  men  have  made  many 
guesses.  But  really  we  know  nothing  about 
the  "  How."  We  know  that  the  self  in  that 
life  can  think  and  remember  and  love.  We 
know  that  we  can  still  communicate  thoughts 
to  each  other.  Can  we  not  leave  with  God  the 
"  how  "  of  recognition  ? 

In  several  places  Scripture  seems  to  suggest 
that  the  souls  of  the  departed  are  clothed  in 
some  kind  of  visible  spirit  shape.  They  are 
spoken  of  as  not  only  recognized  but  in  some 
way  seen  as  in  the  case  of  Samuel  and  of  Dives 
and  Lazarus  and  of  Moses  and  Elias  at  the 
Transfiguration  and  of  our  Lord  Himself  in  the 
spiritual  body  after  the  Kesurrection.  They 
seem  to  be  visible  when  they  please  and  as 
they  please. 

But  when  a  mother  asks,  how  then  should 
she  know  her  child  who  died  twenty  years  ago, 
one  feels  that  recognition  must  be  something 
spiritual  and  not  depending  on  visible  shape. 
Even  here  on  earth  much  of  our  recognition  is 
spiritual.  Soul  recognizes  soul.  We  recognize 
in  some  degree  good  and  evil  character  of  souls 


Recognition  107 

even  through  the  coarse  covering  of  the  body. 
We  instinctively,  as  we  say,  trust  or  distrust 
people  on  first  appearance.  Or  again,  a  slight 
young  stripling  goes  away  to  India  and  returns 
in  twenty  years  a  big,  bearded,  broad-shoul 
dered  man,  with  practically  no  outward  resem 
blance  to  the  boy  that  went  away.  But  even 
though  he  strive  to  conceal  his  identity  he  can 
not  hide  it  long  from  his  mother.  She  looks 
into  his  eyes  and  her  soul  leaps  out  to  him. 
Call  it  instinct,  insight,  intuition,  sympathy, 
what  you  please,  it  is  the  spiritual  vision,  soul 
recognizing  soul.  If  that  spiritual  vision  apart 
from  bodily  shape  plays  so  great  a  part  in  rec 
ognition  here,  may  it  not  be  all-sufficient  there  ? 
In  that  life  where  there  is  consciousness,  char 
acter,  memory,  love,  longing  for  our  dear  ones, 
and  power  of  communication,  is  it  conceivable 
that  we  should  have  intercourse  with  our  loved 
and  longed  for,  without  any  thrill  of  recogni 
tion?  Surely  not.  Instinctively  we  shall 
know. 

It  was  not  mother  that  I  knew  thy  face, 
It  was  iny  heart  that  cried  out  Mother ! l 

1  Momerie.     Immortality. 


lo8  The  Near  Hereafter 

Nay,  shall  we  not  know  one  another  there 
far  more  thoroughly  than  we  do  here? 
"  Now,"  says  St.  Paul,  "  we  see  in  a  mirror, 
darkly,  but  then  face  to  face.  Now  I  know  in 
part,  then  shall  I  know  even  as  also  I  have  been 
known."  St.  Paul's  thought  is  of  our  fuller 
knowledge  of  things  hereafter.  Does  it  not  in 
clude  also  our  fuller  knowledge  of  one  another  ? 
I  met  this  passage  lately  in  a  letter  of  Phillips 
Brooks:  "I  wonder  what  sort  of  knowledge 
we  shall  have  of  our  friends  in  the  Hereafter 
and  what  we  shall  do  to  keep  up  our  intimacy 
with  one  another.  There  will  be  one  good 
thing  about  it.  I  suppose  we  shall  see  through 
one  another  to  begin  with  and  start  off  on  quite 
a  new  basis  of  mutual  understanding.  I  should 
think  it  would  be  awful  at  first,  but  afterwards 
it  must  be  nice  to  feel  that  your  friends  knew 
the  worst  of  you  and  you  need  not  be  contin 
ually  in  fear  that  they  will  find  out  what  you 
really  are." 

I  think  a  simple  natural  thought  such  as  that 
seems  to  bring  the  idea  of  spiritual  recognition 
more  within  our  ken.  But  we  must  remember 
that  our  conjectures  about  the  MODE  of  recogni 
tion  .have  very  little  basis.  The  FACT  of  rec- 


Recognition  109 

ognition    we   may  practically  assume.      The 
"  how  "  we  must  leave  with  God. 

"  Soul  of  my  soul  I  shall  meet  thee  again. 
With  God  be  the  rest.77 


CHAPTEE  VIII 
THE  COMMUNION  OF  SAINTS 

WE  have  already  seen    that  the  evi 
dence  of  Scriptures  leads  us  to  the  as 
surance  that  our  dear  ones  departed 
are  living  a  vivid,  conscious  life  ;  that  there  is 
continuance  of  personal  identity.     "  I  "  am  still 
"  I,"  and  that  there  is  memory  still,  clear  and 
distinct,  of  the  old  friends  and  the  old  scenes 
on  earth. 


We  pass  on  to  consider  the  relations  between 
ourselves  and  them.  Do  they  know  now  of  our 
life  on  earth  ?  Can  there  be  between  us  com 
radeship  in  any  sense  ?  Can  there  be  love  and 
care  and  sympathy  and  prayer  between  us  on 
these  two  sides  of  the  grave,  as  there  is  be 
tween  friends  on  earth  on  the  two  sides  of  the 
Atlantic  ? 

The  Church  says  yes,  and  calls  it  in  her  creed, 
the  Communion  of  Saints.  The  Communion  of 

Saints  —  a  very  grand  name,  but  it  means  only 
110 


The  Communion  of  Saints         1 1 1 

a  very  simple  thing — just  loving  sympathy  be 
tween  us  and  these  elder  brothers  and  sisters 
beyond  the  grave. 

The  term  "  saint "  in  the  Xew  Testament 
only  means  any  poor  humble  servant  of  Christ  { 
"  set  apart "  to  Him,  baptized  into  His  name,  j 
Communion  means  Fellowship,  Comradeship. 
Therefore  the  Communion  of  Saints  simply 
means  fellowship  between  Christians,  and  in 
church  language  has  come  chiefly  to  mean  fel 
lowship  between  Christians  at  this  side  and  at 
the  other  side  of  death.  Knowledge  and  com 
radeship  and  sympathy  and  love  and  prayer  be 
tween  the  church  MILITANT  on  earth  and  the 
church  EXPECTANT  in  Paradise,  as  they  both 
look  forward  to  the  final  joy  of  the  church 
TRIUMPHANT  in  Heaven,  and  meantime  co 
operate  one  with  the  other  to  bring  the  whole 
world  within  the  Kingdom  of  Christ. 

§2 

You  see  that  it  is  a  prominent  doctrine  of 
the  Church's  creed,  and  rightly  understood,  it 
is  a  very  beautiful  and  touching  doctrine — not 
only  because  of  the  union  of  fellowship  with 
our  departed — but  especially  because  the  bond 


112  The  Near  Hereafter 

of  that  union  and  fellowship  is  our  dear  Lord 
Himself,  whom  we  and  they  alike  love  and 
thank  and  praise  and  pray  to  and  worship,  and 
from  whom  we  and  they  alike  derive  the  Divine 
sustenance  of  our  souls. 

You  know  what  a  bond  of  union  it  is  between 
two  men  even  to  find  that  they  both  deeply 
honour  and  admire  and  love  the  same  friend  and 
benefactor.  They  become  one  in  him.  The 
Bible  means  that,  but  a  great  deal  more,  when 
it  says  we  are  "  one  in  Christ  Jesus." 

Here  on  earth,  there  in  Paradise,  is  His  pres 
ence.  Here  on  earth,  there  in  Paradise,  is  the 
love  and  prayer  and  praise  going  forth  to  Him, 
and  the  strength  and  power  of  God  coming 
back  from  Him.  You  know  His  own  simile,  "  I 
am  the  Yine,  ye  are  the  branches."  fYom  the 
central  Yine  the  life  rises  and  flows  to  every 
farthest  branch  and  twig  and  leaf,  connecting 
them  all  in  the  one  life.  He  the  Sacred  Yine  is 
on  earth  with  us  and  in  Paradise  with  them. 
Some  of  the  branches  are  in  the  shadow  here,, 
some  of  them  are  in  the  sunlight  there,  but  we 
are  all  united  through  the  Lord  Himself.  He 
is  the  Yine,  we  are  the  branches.  Because  He 
is  with  us  here,  prayer  and  praise  and  all  the 


The  Communion  of  Saints         1 13 

functions  of  the  Church  are  here.     Because  He  ] 
is  with  them  in  Paradise  prayer  and  praise  and  / 
all  the  functions  of  the  Church  go  on  in  Para-  > 
dise.     Every  Sunday  as  we  in  our  poor  way 
love  Him  and  worship  Him  and  pray  to  Him 
and  praise  Him,  our  dear  ones  beyond  are  doing 
the  very  same.     Notice  how  in  the  CommunionN 
Service    we    remind    ourselves    of    the    fact. 
"  Therefore  with  angels  and  archangels  and  all 
the  company  of  Heaven  we  laud  and  magnify 
Thy  holy  name,"  etc.     It  is  not  we  alone  who 
feed  on  His  divine  life,  it  is  not  the  altar  on 
earth  alone  that  communciates  the  all-prevail 
ing  virtues  of  the  atoning  Blood,  for  the  same 
"Victim  is  the  central  object  of  adoration  beyond, 
as  saints  and  angels  and  all  redeemed  crea 
tion  are  with  us  taking  up  together  the  chorus 
of  that  everlasting  hymn. 

If  we  on  this  side  were  living  closer  to  our 
Lord  and  closer  to  our  departed,  how  close 
might  that  comradeship  become  !  We  should 
tell  our  Lord  so  much  about  each  other.  We 
should  think  of  each  other  and  remember  each 
other  and  sympathize  with  each  other  and  pray 
for  each  other.  Why,  we  could  do  everything 
for  each  other  that  we  can  do  on  earth  when 


J14  The  Near  Hereafter 

separated  by  the  Atlantic — except  just  write 
home.  (Ah,  how  one  wishes  that  they  could 
"  write  home  "  ! )  We  are  very  close  if  we 
would  but  realize  it. 

"  Death  hides  but  it  does  not  divide 
Thou  art  but  on  Christ's  other  side, 
Thou  art  with  Christ  and  Christ  with  me 
In  Him  I  still  am  close  to  thee." 

II 

Yes,  you  say,  that  is  a  beautiful  thought. 
But  is  that  all  ?  My  poor  heart  is  craving  for 
more  communion  than  that.  Do  they  know  or 
care  about  my  love  and  sorrow  to-day  ?  And 
are  they  helping  me  ?  Are  they  praying  for 
me  to  that  dear  Lord  whom  we  both  love — in 
whose  presence  we  both  stand  to-day?  And 
can  I  do  anything  for  them  on  my  side  in  this 
"  Communion  of  Saints  "  ? 

§-f 
^ 

Do  they  pray  for  us  or  help  us  in  any  way  ? 
Does  any  one  need  to  ask  that  question  ? 

Since  they  are  with  Christ  of  course  they 
pray.  The  world  to  come  is  the  very  atmos 
phere  of  prayer.  St.  John  in  his  vision  tells  of 
"  the  offering  of  the  golden  vials  full  of  odours 


The  Communion  of  Saints         115 

which  are  the  prayers  of  the  saints "  (Rev. 
v.  8).  And  again  three  chapters  later  the 
angel  stood  to  offer  the  prayers  of  all  saints  upon 
the  golden  altar. 

Can  you  imagine  your  mother  who  never 
went  to  bed  here  without  earnest  prayer  for  her 
boy  going  into  that  life  with  full  consciousness 
and  full  memory  of  the  dear  old  home  on  earth, 
and  never  a  prayer  for  her  boy  rising  to  the 
altar  of  God  ? 

"Why,  even  the  selfish  Dives,  after  death, 
could  not  help  praying  for  his  brothers. 

Aye,  she  is  praying  for  you.  I  think  amongst 
the  most  precious  prayers  before  the  golden 
altar  are  the  mother's  prayers  for  her  boy  who 
is  left  behind  on  earth. 

§2 

But,  you  say,  she  does  not  know  anything 
about  my  life  or  my  needs  on  earth.  Even  if 
she  did  not  know  she  would  surely  pray  for  you. 
But  I  am  not  so  sure  that  she  does  not  know. 
There  are  several  hints  in  Scripture  to  suggest 
that  she  does  know — hints  so  strong  that  if 
you  are  doing  anything  now  that  she  would  like 
I  should  advise  you  to  keep  on  doing  it  and  if 


1 16  The  Near  Hereafter 

you  are  doing  anything  now  that  you  would  not 
wish  her  to  know,  I  should  advise  you  to  stop 
doing  it. 

Our  Lord  represents  Abraham  as  knowing  all 
about  Moses  and  the  prophets  who  came  one 
thousand  years  after  his  time  (St.  Luke  xvi.  29). 

Our  Lord  distinctly  tells  the  Jews  that 
Abraham  in  that  life  knew  all  about  His  mis 
sion  on  earth.  "Your  Father  Abraham  re 
joiced  to  see  My  day  and  he  saw  it  and  was 
glad  "  (St.  John  viii.  56). 

At  the  Transfiguration,  too,  Moses  and  Elias 
came  out  from  that  waiting  life  to  speak  with 
Christ  of  His  decease  which  He  should  ac 
complish  at  Jerusalem.  Does  it  not  suggest 
at  once  that  they  and  their  great  comrades 
within  the  veil  were  watching  eagerly  and 
knowing  all  about  the  life  of  Christ  and  the 
great  crisis  of  man's  redemption  towards  which 
they  had  been  working  on  earth  long  years 
ago.  Can  any  one  believe  that  the  whole 
Waiting  Church  within  the  veil,  living,  and 
conscious,  and  thinking,  and  remembering  were 
absolutely  ignorant  and  unconcerned  about  the 
greatest  event  that  ever  came  in  the  history  of 
their  race  ? 


The  Communion  of  Saints         117 

The  writer  in  the  Epistle  to  the  Hebrews 
apparently  believed  that  our  departed  ones 
were  watching  our  course,  for  after  a  long  list 
of  the  great  departed  heroes  of  faith  in  olden 
time  he  writes  to  encourage  us  in  the  race  on 
earth.  "  Seeing  that  we  are  encompassed  about , 
with  so  great  a  cloud  of  witnesses  let  us  lay 
aside  every  weight  and  run  with  patience  the 
race  that  is  set  before  us  "  (Heb.  xii.  1).  The 
picture  suggested  is  that  of  the  runners  in  the 
amphitheatre  on  earth  and  the  galleries  of 
Creation  crowded  with  sympathetic  watchers 
like  the  "  old  boys  "  of  a  great  English  school 
coming  back  at  the  annual  school  games  to 
cheer  on  the  lads  and  remember  how  they 
had  run  themselves  long  ago  in  the  very  same 
fields.1 

Ill 

And  the  hope  which  Scripture  thus  suggests 
and    never    contradicts    commends    itself    to 

1  It  is  true  that  the  Greek  word  translated  "witnesses  "  is 
not  the  word  meaning  "spectators  "  but  rather  "witnesses 
for  the  faith,"  but  as  most  good  commentators  (including 
Bishop  Westcott)  say — it  is  impossible  to  exclude  the  thought 
of  spectators  in  an  amphitheatre  watching  a  race.  The  Re 
vised  Version,  too,  seems  to  accept  this  view  for  it  prints  the 
word  "witnesses"  without  any  marginal  remark. 


li8  The  Near  Hereafter 

reason  and  to  the  deepest  instincts  in  our 
hearts. 

I  think  of  a  mother  leaving  her  children  and 
going  into  a  full  conscious  life,  where,  mark 
you,  she  can  still  think  and  remember  and  love. 
I  see  that  her  love  for  them  was  probably  the 
most  powerful  influence  in  ennobling  her  life 
here.  And  she  has  gone  into  a  life  where  that 
ennobling  is  God's  chief  aim  for  her.  Since 
she  can  remember  them,  I  feel  quite  sure  that 
if  she  had  the  choice  she  would  want  to  watch 
over  them  always. 

But,  somebody  says,  she  might  not  be  quite 
happy  if  she  knew  all  that  they  had  to  go 
through.  Seeing  that  at  any  rate  she  remem 
bers  them,  do  you  think  she  would  be  more  happy 
if  she  knew  that  they  might  have  to  go  through 
troubles  of  which  she  could  not  learn  anything  ? 
Put  yourself  in  the  place  of  any  mother  on 
earth  that  you  know  and  ask  if  it  would  make 
her  any  happier  to  stop  all  letters  about  her 
children  whom  she  felt  might  be  in  danger  or 
trouble.  Are  you  quite  sure  that  in  that  spirit 
life  a  peaceful  contentment  like  that  of  the 
cow  who  forgets  her  calf  is  the  highest 
thing  to  be  desired  ?  The  higher  any  soul 


The  Communion  of  Saints         119 

grows  on  earth  the  less  can  it  escape  unselfish 
sorrow  for  the  sake  of  others.  Must  it  not  be 
so  in  that  land  also  ?  Surely  the  Highest 
Himself  must  have  more  sorrow  than  any  one  I l 
else  for  the  sins  and  troubles  of  men.  Have 
you  ever  thought  of  that  "  eternal  pain  "  of 
God  ?  If  there  be  joy  in  His  presence  over  one 
sinner  that  repenteth  must  there  not  be  pain  in 
His  presence  over  one  that  repenteth  not  ? 

There  are  surely  higher  things  in  God's  plans 
for  His  saints  than  mere  selfish  happiness  and 
content.  There  is  the  blessedness  that  comes 
of  sympathy  with  Him  over  human  sorrow  and 
pain.  "We  but  degrade  the  thought  of  the 
blessedness  of  the  redeemed  when  we  desire 
that  they  should  escape  that. 

And  since  in  that  life  she  is  "  with  Christ " 
and  able  doubtless  to  win  for  her  children 
more  than  she  could  ever  win  on  earth,  and 
since  she  knows  that  Christ  is  more  solicitous 
for  them  than  she  is  herself  and  that  she  can 
trust  Him  utterly  to  do  for  them  more  than  she 
can  ask  or  think,  does  it  not  seem  far  more 
probable  that  she  should  still  know  and  care 
and  love  and  pray  and  share  in  the  care  and 
sympathy  of  Christ  for  them  ? 


12O  The  Near  Hereafter 

Yes,  I  think  probably  she  does  know  about 
them.  I  know  certainly  she  prays  about  them. 
I  myself  hope  and  believe  that  some  of  the 
best  helps  in  my  life  have  been  won  for  me  by 
those  on  the  other  side  who  love  me  and  who 
are  so  near  to  their  Lord. 


And  it  is  a  strong  confirmation  of  that  belief 
when  I  find  it  the  belief  of  the  great  bishops 
and  teachers  of  the  early  Church  in  its  purest 
and  most  loving  days,  the  days  nearest  to  those 
of  Christ  and  His  apostles. 

St.  Cyprian  the  martyr  bishop  of  Carthage 
who  was  born  in  the  century  after  St.  John's 
death  (A.  D.  200)  made  an  agreement  with 
his  friend  Cornelius  that  whichever  of  them 
died  first  should  in  the  Unseen  Land  remember 
in  prayer  him  who  was  left  behind.  "  Let  us 
mutually  be  mindful  of  each  other.  .  .  . 
On  both  sides  let  us  always  pray  for  each  other, 
let  us  relieve  our  afflictions  and  distresses  by  a 
reciprocity  of  love  and  whichever  of  us  goes 
hence  before  the  other  by  the  speed  of  the 
Divine  favour,  let  our  affection  continue  before 
the  Lord,  let  not  prayer  for  our  brothers  and 


The  Communion  of  Saints         121 

sisters  cease  before  the  mercy  of  the  Father  " 
(Ep.  Ivii.  ad  Cornel.).  And  in  the  days  of  the 
plague  at  Carthage,  A.  D.  252,  he  comforts  his 
fellow  citizens  reminding  them  of  "  the  large 
number  of  dear  ones,  parents,  brothers,  children, 
a  goodly  and  numerous  crowd  longing  for  us 
and  while  their  own  immortality  is  assured  still 
longing  for  our  salvation." 

Origen,  who  was  a  contemporary  of  Cyprian, 
says,  "  All  the  souls  who  have  departed  this  life 
still  retaining  their  love  for  those  who  are  in 
the  world  concern  themselves  for  their  salvation 
and  aid  them  by  their  prayers  and  mediation 
with  God.  For  it  is  written  in  the  Book  of 
the  Maccabees,  'This  is  Jeremiah  the  prophet 
who  always  prays  for  the  people ' "  (in  Cant. 
Horn.  iii.).  And  in  another  work  he  says, 
"It  is  my  opinion  that  all  those  fathers  who 
have  fallen  asleep  before  us  fight  on  our  side 
and  aid  us  by  their  prayers "  (in  Jesu  Nave 
Horn.  xvi.  ch.  19).  And  again  "  They  (in  that 
unseen  life)  understand  who  are  worthy  of 
Divine  approval  and  are  not  only  well  disposed 
to  these  themselves,  but  cooperate  with  them 
in  their  endeavours  to  please  God,  they  seek 
His  favour  on  their  behalf  and  with  their 


122  The  Near  Hereafter 

prayers  and  intercessions  they  join  their  own." 
And  again,  "  These  (in  the  Unseen  Life)  pray 
for  us  and  bring  help  to  our  perishable  race, 
and  if  I  may  so  speak,  take  up  arms  alongside 
of  it "  (Contra  Celsum  viii.  64). 

St.  Gregory  Nazianzen  is  preaching  the  fu 
neral  sermon  of  St.  Basil.  "  He  still  prays  for 
the  people,"  he  says,  "  for  he  did  not  so  leave 
us  as  to  have  left  us  altogether."  And  in  his 
funeral  sermon  over  his  own  father,  "  I  am  sat 
isfied  that  he  accomplishes  there  now  by  his 
prayers  more  than  he  ever  did  by  his  teaching  just 
in  proportion  as  he  approaches  nearer  to  God 
after  having  shaken  off  the  fetters  of  his  body." 

St.  Cyril,  Bishop  of  Jerusalem,  in  his  Cate 
chetical  lectures,  and  St.  Chrysostom  in  several 
of  his  homilies  speak  of  the  help  we  get  through 
the  prayers  of  departed  holy  men. 

St.  Ambrose  in  his  great  grief  at  his  brother's 
death,  says:  "What  other  consolation  is  left 
me  but  this  that  I  hope  to  come  to  thee  my 
brother  speedily,  that  thy  departure  will  not 
entail  a  long  separation  between  us,  and  that 
power  may  be  granted  me  by  thy  intercessions 
that  thou  mayest  summon  me  who  long  to  join 
thee  more  speedily." 


The  Communion  of  Saints         123 

St.  Jerome,  who  gave  us  the  Yulgate,  the 
great  Eevised  Bible  of  the  Western  Church,  is 
comforting  a  mother  who  has  lost  a  daughter. 
"  She  entreats  the  Lord  for  thee  and  begs  for 
me  the  pardon  of  my  sins."  Again  to  another 
friend,  Heliodorus,  he  speaks  of  the  life  after 
death.  "There  you  will  be  made  a  fellow 
burgher  with  St.  Paul.  There  also  you  will 
seek  for  your  parents  the  rights  of  the  same 
citizenship.  There  too  you  will  pray  for  me 
who  spurred  you  on  to  victory."  Again  he 
vigorously  disputes  with  Vigilantius  who  as 
serts  that  prayers  and  intercessions  must  cease 
after  death.  "  If  the  apostles  and  martyrs 
while  still  in  the  body  are  able  to  pray  for  oth 
ers  ...  how  much  more  may  they  do  so 
now.  .  .  .  One  man,  Moses,  obtains  from 
God  pardon  for  600,000  men  in  arms ;  and 
Stephen,  the  imitator  of  his  Lord,  begs  forgive 
ness  for  his  persecutors ;  shall  their  power  be 
less  after  they  have  begun  to  be  with  Christ  ?  "  ' 

§o 
& 

But  sympathy  and  prayer  must  not  be  on  one 
side  only.  It  must  be  mutual  in  the  Commu 
nion  of  Saints.  They  remembering  and  loving, 

1  Luckock,  After  Death. 


124  The  Near  Hereafter 

and  thinking  about  us.  We  remembering  and 
loving,  and  thinking  about  them.  They  asking 
from  their  Lord  blessing  for  us.  We  asking 
from  Him  blessing  for  them.  For  surely  they 
are  not  above  wanting  His  blessings  still — not 
even  the  best  of  them  though  safe  with  Him, 
though  forgiven  their  sins,  they  are  still  im 
perfect,  still  needing  to  grow  in  grace,  in  purifi 
cation,  in  fitness  for  the  final  heaven  by  and  by. 
And  we  can  help  their  growth  as  they  can  help 
ours. 

Some  of  the  most  deeply  religious  people  that 
I  know  shrink  from  the  thought  of  prayer  for 
the  departed.  There  has  been  reason  for  it. 
This  beautiful  old  custom,  the  custom  of  the 
Jews,  the  custom  of  the  whole  Christian  Church 
till  the  Eeformation '  had  grown  at  that  time 
into  great  corruption.  And  one  danger  of 
great  corruption  is  that  indignant  reformers 
are  likely  to  tear  away  more  than  the  corrup 
tion,  "  hating  even  the  garment  spotted  by  the 
flesh."  So  it  was  here.  Because  of  the  abuse 
men  feared  even  the  use.  In  their  hatred  of 

1  The  evidence  for  this  can  be  seen  in  full  in  any  standard 
work  on  the  subject,  e.  g.,  Luckock,  After  Death;  or  Lee, 
Christian  Doctrine  of  Prayer  for  the  Departed. 


The  Communion  of  Saints         125 

the  sordid  traffic  in  masses  for  the  dead  they 
looked  with  suspicion  on  any  prayer  for  the 
departed.  And  at  length  men  began  to  think 
that  such  prayers  were  even  wrong. 

Ah,  it  was  a  pity !  Our  departed  ones  have 
more  quickly  passed  into  oblivion.  The  great 
Paradise  life  has  almost  faded  from  our  view. 
We  are  the  more  lonely  in  our  desolate  be 
reavement.  Perhaps  our  dear  ones  beyond  are 
the  more  lonely,  too,  if  they  know  about  our 
life  and  our  prayers  on  earth.  A  friend  said  to 
me  lately,  "  I  was  a  little  child  when  the  news 
came  of  father's  death  far  away.  That  night  in 
my  prayers  I  prayed  for  father  as  usual.  But 
my  aunt  stopped  me.  '  Darling,'  she  said, '  you 
must  not  pray  for  father  now ;  it  is  wrong.' 
And  I  can  remember  still  how  I  shrank  back 
feeling  as  if  some  one  had  slammed  the  door 
and  shut  him  outside." 

I  think  we  should  be  happier  and  better,  I 
think  the  Unseen  World  would  come  back 
more  clearly  on  our  horizon  if  we  kept  our 
dear  ones  in  our  prayers  as  we  used  to  do  be 
fore  they  died.  Do  not  keep  any  hidden 
chambers  in  your  hearts  shut  out  from  Christ. 
Bring  your  dear  departed  ones  to  Him  as  you 


126  The  Near  Hereafter 

bring  all  else  to  Him.  He  knows  what  is  best 
for  them.  Pray  only  for  that.  Pray  "  Lord 
help  them  to  grow  closer  to  Thee.  Help  them 
if  it  may  be  to  help  others  and  make  them 
happy  in  Thy  great  Kingdom  until  we  meet 
again."  Pray  something  like  that.  Oh,  how 
can  you  help  doing  it  if  you  love  them  and 
believe  in  prayer  ? 

How  can  I  cease  to  pray  for  thee  ?    Somewhere 
In  God's  wide  universe  thou  art  to-day. 
Can  He  not  reach  thee  with  His  tender  care  I 
Can  He  not  hear  nie  when  for  thee  I  pray  ? 
Somewhere  thou  livest  and  hast  need  of  Him, 
Somewhere  thy  soul  sees  higher  heights  to  climb, 
And  somewhere,  too,  there  may  be  valleys  dim 
Which    thou  must  pass  to  reach  the  heights 

sublime. 

Then  all  the  more  because  thou  canst  not  hear 
Poor  human  words  of  blessing  will  I  pray. 
O,  true  brave  heart,  God  bless  thee  wheresoever 
In  God7 s  wide  universe  thou  art  to-day  ! 


CHAPTEE  IX 
GEOWTH  AND  PUEIFICATION 

WHAT   is  the  main  purpose  of   the 
Intermediate  Life  ?    Is  there  some 
thing  to  be  done  there  which  cannot 
be  fully  done  at  any  other  time  ? 

Let  us  still  try  to  keep  to  the  firm  ground  of 
Scripture,  and  to  avoid  confusion  let  us  confine 
ourselves  still  to  the  case  of  those  who  have 
died,  in  some  degree  at  least,  in  penitence  and 
faith. 

§1 

"We  have  already  seen  that  Scripture  inti 
mates  that  that  life  is  not  one  of  sleep  or 
unconsciousness,  ft  is  a  clear  conscious  life. 
It  is  therefore  natural  to  ask  what  happens  in 
it  ?  What  is  the  use  of  it  ?  Science  and  ex 
perience  teach  that  growth  is  the  law  of  all  the 
life  which  we  know  anything  about.  Even  if 
we  had  no  further  light  of  revelation  we  should 
find  it  difficult  to  believe  that  imperfect  beings 
dying  in  the  grace  of  God  pass  into  that  life 

127 


i  28  The  Near  Hereafter 

and  live  in  it  for  years  or  for  ages  without  any 
growth  or  development. 

Scripture  also  teaches  that  God's  aim  for  us 
is  not  merely  that  we  should  escape  hell  or 
just  creep  into  heaven.  Our  goal  is  to  grow 
into  the  likeness  of  God,  to  "  rise  to  the  stature 
of  the  perfect  man,  even  to  the  stature  of 
the  fullness  of  Christ."  How  many  of  us  are 
ever  even  in  sight  of  that  goal  when  we  die  ? 

But  Scripture  goes  further  still.  It  points 
us  forward  to  the  final  stage  of  being,  to  the 
Beatific  Vision  of  God  in  the  far  future  and 
tells  us  with  awe  that  that  God  "is  of  purer 
eyes  than  to  behold  iniquity,"  that  "  even  the 
heavens  are  not  clean  in  His  sight ; "  that  into 
that  final  abode  of  bliss  "  nothing  that  defileth 
shall  enter  in."  Which  of  us,  the  greatest  soul 
of  us  all,  can  look  forward  to  such  a  prospect 
without  bowing  himself  in  dread  like  Isaiah  of 
old,  "  Woe  is  me  for  I  am  undone,  for  I  am  a 
man  of  unclean  lips,  that  mine  eyes  should  see 
the  King  of  the  Lord  of  Hosts  !  "  If  there  be 
no  growth  or  purification  in  the  Waiting  Life 
what  hope  is  there  ever  for  any  one  of  us  of 
fitness  for  the  presence  of  the  all  holy  God  ? 

Think  that  the  great  majority  of  those  who 


Growth  and  Purification  129 

die,  even  though  penitent  and  striving  after 
right,  have  much  of  evil  clinging  to  them ;  that 
many  after  a  whole  life  of  ingraining  their 
characters  with  evil  have  brought  sorrowfully 
to  Christ  at  last  their  poor  defiled  souls ;  that 
even  the  best  is  not  without  many  faults  and 
stains.  If  nothing  that  defileth  shall  enter 
Heaven,  if  growth  is  a  law  of  all  life  as  far  as 
we  know  it,  are  we  not  practically  compelled  to 
believe  that  much  of  the  growth  and  purification 
needed  to  fit  us  for  God's  presence  shall  take 
place  in  the  great  "Waiting  Life  ? 

And  this  belief  and  hope  for  all  these  poor 
faulty  souls  in  whom  the  good  work  of  God  has 
begun  on  earth,  St.  Paul  confirms.  "  Being 
confident  of  this  very  thing,  that  He  who  hath 
begun  a  good  work  in  you  will  perfect  it  UNTIL 

THE     DAY     OF     JESUS    CHEIST  " — i.    6.,    right 

through  the  earth  life,  right  through  the  In 
termediate  Life,  until  the  last  great  scene  in  the 
drama  of  our  history  opens  at  the  Judgment 
Day. 


How  this    shall    take    place   God   has  not 
definitely  revealed  to  us.     But  God  has  given 


130  The  Near  Hereafter 

us  reason  and  common  sense  to  enable  us  to 
draw  conclusions  from  what  He  has  revealed. 
Since  in  that  life  I  am  the  same  conscious  "I," 
with  the  same  consciously  continuous  person 
ality,  with  the  same  conscience  and  memory, 
I  may  surely  expect  that  the  Holy  Spirit  "  who 
hath  begun  a  good  work  in  me  and  will  con 
tinue  it  until  the  day  of  Jesus  Christ" — 
will  continue  it  in  much  the  same  natural 
way  as  here,  through  Conscience  and  Memory 
and  the  Sense  of  His  Presence.  Only  that 
these  will  be  all  more  keen  and  effective 
and  free  from  the  disturbance  of  the  bodily 
senses  and  the  distractions  of  this  life  on 
earth. 

CONSCIENCE  here  is  the  throne  of  the  Holy 
Ghost,  from  which  He  rules  and  directs  my  life. 
Therefore  my  body  is  "  the  temple  of  the  Holy 
Ghost."  But  Conscience  here  is  greatly  weak 
ened  by  fears  and  hopes  and  ambitions  and 
distractions  of  various  kinds.  At  times,  when 
I  lie  awake  at  night  and  think  about  my  life, 
or  when  I  enter  into  my  closet  to  prepare  by 
special  concentration  of  spirit  for  my  Holy 
Communion,  I  get  some  dim  notions  of  what 
Conscience  might  effect  in  me  if  it  had  a  free 


Growth  and  Purification          131 

hand.  In  THAT  life  of  close  spiritual  concen 
tration,  when  the  outer  world  is  shut  off  and 
the  soul  enters  into  its  own  deepest  recesses, 
contemplating  itself,  contemplating  its  past  and 
its  future,  contemplating  the  deep  tender  love 
of  Him  who  is  there  present  as  in  Palestine 
long  ago,  and  feeling  that  in  spite  of  all  my 
shameful  ingratitude  He  is  loving  me  and 
blessing  me  and  watching  tenderly  over  me — 
surely  I  may  expect  great  things  of  the  opera 
tion  of  Conscience  in  me. 

MEMORY  in  this  life  is  a  very  wonderful 
thing.  It  can  call  up  in  a  moment,  for  Con 
science  to  work  on,  pictures  of  half  a  century 
ago.  But  in  the  fast  crowding  impressions  on 
the  senses  Memory  is  overtaxed  and  has  to  lay 
away  in  its  storehouse  of  subconsciousness 
whole  tracts  of  the  past  which  never  rise  up 
before  my  conscious  thought  at  all.  Psycho 
logical  science  has  much  to  say  in  late  years 
about  this  storehouse  of  subconscious  memory 
and  the  power  that,  unknown  to  me,  it  is  ex 
erting  on  my  life.  It  is  there  all  the  time, 
"under  the  threshold."  These  buried  mem 
ories  are  alive,  ready  to  spring  up,  but  asleep— 
in  abeyance. 


132  The  Near  Hereafter 

§3 

Now  think  what  this  means  for  Conscience 
and  for  Memory  as  the  handmaid  of  Conscience 
in  the  great  contemplative  life  after  Death. 
There  is  no  good  or  evil  thing  that  I  have  ever 
done  but  Conscience  has  pronounced  on.  Some 
of  these  judgments  I  remember.  Some  of  them 
I  forget.  In  the  many  distractions  of  life  and 
the  desire  to  escape  painful  thoughts,  there  has 
dropped  down  under  the  threshold  of  my  con 
scious  thought  a  vast  store  of  memories  of 
which  I  am  oblivious,  but  of  which  one  and 
another  and  another  springs  up  at  times  un 
expectedly  with  a  startling  reminder  of  the 
great  hidden  store  behind.  I  meet  by  chance 
an  old  friend  of  my  boyhood,  and  as  he  talks 
about  the  old  times,  picture  after  picture  springs 
up  into  the  light,  memories  which  had  long 
gone  from  me  and  which  would  never  have 
sprung  up  from  "  under  the  threshold  "  but  for 
the  chance  stimulation  of  his  talk. 

We  have  often  heard  of  drowning  people  on 
the  verge  of  death  having  the  forgotten  mem 
ories  of  half  a  lifetime  flashed  back  in  a  mo 
ment.  An  old  friend  once  told  me  a  curious 
experience.  "  I  was  crossing  a  railway  line 


Growth  and  Purification  133 

hurriedly  on  a  wet  day.  As  I  rushed  over  the 
rails  the  Express  came  in  view.  I  slipped  and 
fell— fortunately  into  a  hollow  where  men  had 
been  working,  and  swift  as  a  flash  the  Express 
swept  over  me.  The  experience  of  that  half 
minute  I  shall  never  forget.  It  seemed  that 
my  whole  life  was  blazoned  before  me  in 
thirty  seconds.  Things  that  I  had  not  re 
membered  for  forty  years  past  flashed  back 
in  a  moment  as  if  they  had  happened  yes 
terday." 

That  is  what  Memory  can  do  even  in  this 
life  under  strong  excitation,  calling  up  its  for 
gotten  stores.  Think  what  its  power  may  be 
in  that  life  as  a  handmaid  to  Conscience.  With 
all  its  old  lumber  rooms  of  forgotten  deeds 
thrown  open — with  all  the  forgotten  feelings  of 
my  life — boyhood,  youth,  manhood — open  for 
my  contemplation.  My  impatience  and  God's 
patience,  my  sorrows  and  why  God  sent  them, 
my  mercies,  all  the  kindly  providences  of  God 
working  unknown  to  me  all  my  days. 

And  my  sins — some  sins  that  I  hate  to  think 
of,  some  that  I  had  almost  succeeded  in  forget 
ting,  all  standing  out  clearly  before  me  in  the 
unsparing  light  of  that  mysterious  life. 


134  The  Near  Hereafter 

I  sat  alone  with  my  Conscience 

In  the  place  where  time  had  ceased. 
We  discoursed  of  my  former  living 

In  the  laud  where  the  years  increased. 
And  I  felt  I  should  have  to  answer 

The  questions  it  put  to  me, 
And  to  face  those  questions  and  answers 

In  that  dim  eternity. 

And  the  ghosts  of  forgotten  actions 

Came  floating  before  my  sight, 
And  things  that  I  thought  were  dead  things 

Were  alive  with  a  terrible  might. 
And  the  vision  of  all  my  past  life 

Was  an  awful  thing  to  face 
Alone,  alone  with  my  Conscience, 

In  that  strange  and  lonely  place. 

Aye,  my  Conscience  must  do  its  work  some 
day  if  I  keep  it  from  doing  it  now.  But  all 
this  will  be  in  the  presence  of  my  Saviour. 
They  are  "  with  Christ." 

Every  memory  will  be  more  keen  and  poig 
nant  and  yet  more  peaceful  and  touching  in 
the  presence  of  that  dear  loving  Lord  who  I 
feel  knows  all  and  yet  has  loved  and  received 
and  forgiven  me  in  spite  of  all,  and  who  is 
watching  over  me  with  deep  tenderness  like 
the  refiner  of  silver  over  His  furnace  as  the 


Growth  and  Purification  135 

dross  is  cleared  away  and  I  grow  steadily  in 
fitness  for  the  glorious  life  of  unselfish  joy 
and  service  in  Heaven. 

But  pain !  You  do  not  like  any  thought  of 
pain  in  connection  with  that  life.  Yes  surely, 
more  or  less,  according  to  one's  state,  and  dying 
gradually  into  perfect  peace.  Growth  of  holi 
ness  does  not  come  to  sinful  man  here  or  there 
but  through  pain,  the  tender  blessed  pain  of 
God's  purification,  the  pain  of  self-reproach, 
the  pain  that  thou  hast  sinned, 

"  The  shame  of  self  and  pity  for  thy  Lord 
That  One  so  sweet  should  e'er  have  placed 

Himself 

At  disadvantage  such,  as  to  be  used 
So  vilely  by  a  being  vile  as  thee." 

But  what  a  sweet  and  wholesome  pain, 
mingled  with  the  sense  of  safety  and  peace  and 
hope — mingled  with  deep  joy  and  boundless 
adoring  gratitude  and  love  as  we  see  the  stain 
of  the  old  sins  steadily  being  effaced  and  look 
forward  to  the  sure  bliss  of  Heaven  in  the  fu 
ture  !  Surely  by  means  of  such  pain  and  grati 
tude  and  adoring  love  God  makes  sinful  souls 
fit  for  Heaven. 


CHAPTER  X 
PEOBATION  IN  THIS  LIFE 

UP  to  this  we  have  been  ignoring  a  large 
proportion  of  the  inhabitants  of  the 
Unseen  Land.  To  avoid  misunder 
standing  we  have  kept  in  view  those  only 
of  whom  we  had  hope  that  they  died  in 
the  fear  and  love  of  God.  But  there  is  no 
evading  the  thought  that  between  these  and 
the  utterly  reprobate,  there  are  multitudes  of 
Christian  and  heathen  in  that  Unseen  Life  to 
day  who  belong  to  neither  class,  mixed  charac 
ters  in  all  varying  degrees  of  good  or  evil.  Of 
many  of  them  it  could  be  said  that  those  who 
knew  them  best  saw  much  that  was  good  and 
lovable  in  them.  But  it  could  not  be  said  that 
they  had  consciously  and  definitely  chosen  for 
Christ. 

They  must  form  the  majority  of  those  to-day 

in  the  Unseen  Land.      Therefore  one  cannot 

help  wondering  about  them.     One  day  death 

overtook  them.     The  thought  of  them  comes 

136 


Probation  in  This  Life  137 

forcibly  when  some  morning  the  newspapers 
startle  us  with  the  story  of  a  great  earthquake 
or  railway  smash  or  shipwreck  or  conflagration 
in  which  hundreds  have  passed  out  of  life  in  a 
moment  and  the  horror  of  the  catastrophe  is 
deepened  by  the  thought  that  they  have  been 
called  away  suddenly  unprepared. 

What  of  their  position  in  the  Intermediate 
Life  ?  Our  Christian  charity  prompts  us  to 
hope  the  best  for  them.  But  are  we  justified 
in  hoping?  It  is  impossible  for  thoughtful, 
sympathetic  men  to  evade  that  question.  It  is 
cowardly  to  evade  it.  At  any  rate  a  treatise 
on  the  Intermediate  Life  can  hardly  pass  over 
altogether  the  thought  of  the  majority  of  its 
inhabitants  and  it  cannot  be  wrong  for  us  hum 
bly  and  reverently  to  think  about  them. 


I  have  already  pointed  out  the  solemn  re 
sponsibility  of  this  earth  life  in  which  acts 
make  habits  and  habits  make  character  and 
character  makes  destiny.  I  am  about  to  point 
out  the  grave  probability,  to  say  the  least  of  it, 
that  in  a  very  real  sense  this  life  may  be  the 
sole  probation  time  for  man.  But  this  does  not 


138  The  Near  Hereafter 

shut  out  the  question  of  the  poor  bereaved 
mother  by  the  side  of  her  dead  son.  "  If  any 
soul  has  not  in  penitence  and  faith  definitely  ac 
cepted  Jesus  Christ  in  this  life  is  it  forever  im 
possible  that  he  may  do  so  in  any  other  life  ?  " 
I  answer  unhesitatingly,  God  forbid !  Else 
what  of  all  the  dead  children  down  through 
the  ages  and  all  the  dead  idiots  and  all  the  mil 
lions  of  dead  heathen  and  all  the  poor  strag 
glers  in  Christian  lands  who  in  their  dreary, 
dingy  lives  had  never  any  fair  chance  of  know 
ing  their  Lord  in  a  way  that  would  lead  them  to 
love  Him,  and  who  have  never  even  thought 
about  accepting  or  rejecting  Him  ?  "  Shall  not 
the  Judge  of  all  the  earth  do  right  ?  "  Shall  not 
the  loving  Father  do  His  best  for  all  ?  Our 
Lord  knew  "  that  if  the  mighty  works  done  in 
Capernaum  had  been  done  in  Tyre  and  Sidon 
they  would  have  repented."  Does  He  not 
there  suggest  that  He  would  take  thought  for 
those  men  of  Tyre  and  Sidon  in  the  Unseen 
Land  ?  Does  He  not  know  the  same  of  many 
gone  unto  that  Unseen  from  heathen  lands  and 
Christian  lands,  who  would  have  loved  Him  if 
they  knew  Him  as  He  really  is  and  who  have 
but  begun  to  know  Him  truly  in  the  world 


Probation  in  This  Life  139 

of  the  dead — of  many  who  in  their  ignorance 
have  tried  to  respond  to  the  dim  light  of  Con 
science  within  and  only  learned  within  the 
veil  really  to  know  Him  the  Lord  of  the  Con 
science,  "the  light  which  lighteth  every  man 
coming  into  the  world  "  (St.  John  i.  9). 

Here  is  no  question  of  encouraging  careless, 
godless  men  with  the  hope  of  a  new  probation. 
Here  is  no  question  of  men  wilfully  rejecting 
Christ.  The  merry,  thoughtless  child — the 
imbecile — the  heathen — had  no  thought  of  re 
jecting  Christ.  The  poor  struggler  in  Christian 
lands,  brought  up  in  evil  surroundings,  who 
though  he  had  heard  of  Christ  yet  saw  no 
trace  of  Christ's  love  in  his  dreary  life — he  can 
not  be  said  to  have  rejected  Christ.  The 
honest  sceptic  who  in  the  last  generation  had 
been  taught  as  a  prominent  truth  of  Christianity 
that  God  decrees  certain  men  to  eternal  Heaven 
and  certain  men  to  eternal  Hell  not  for  any 
good  or  evil  they  had  done  but  to  show  His 
power  and  glory,  and  who  has  therefore  in 
obedience  to  conscience  frankly  rejected  Chris 
tianity — can  he  be  said  to  have  rejected  Christ  ? 

The  possibility  in  this  life  of  putting  oneself 
outside  the  pale  of  salvation  is  quite  awful 


140  The  Near  Hereafter 

enough  without  our  making  it  worse.  It  is 
not  for  us  to  judge  who  is  outside  the  pale  of 
salvation  nor  to  limit  the  love  of  God  by  our 
little  shibboleths.  It  is  on  a  man's  WILL,  not  on 
his  knowledge  or  ignorance  that  destiny  de 
pends.  God  only  can  judge  that.  All  the 
subtle  influences  which  go  to  make  character 
are  known  to  Him  alone.  He  alone  can  weigh 
the  responsibility  of  the  will  in  any  particular 
case.  And  surely  we  know  Him  well  enough 
humbly  to  trust  His  love  to  the  uttermost  for 
every  poor  soul  whom  He  has  created. 

II 

But  this  hope  must  not  ignore  the  solemn 
thought  that  in  a  very  real  sense  the  probation 
of  this  life  seems  the  determining  factor  in 
human  destiny — even  for  the  unthinking — even 
for  the  ignorant — nay  even  for  the  heathen  who 
could  never  have  heard  of  Christ  here.  Eightly 
understood  all  that  we  have  said  does  not  con 
flict  with  this.  It  may  seem  strange  at  first 
sight  to  think  of  the  heathen  as  having  any 
real  probation  here.  Yet,  mark  it  well,  it  is  of 
this  heathen  man  who  could  not  consciously 
have  accepted  Christ  in  this  life  that  St.  Paul 


Probation  in  This  Life  141 

implies  that  his  attitude  in  the  Unseen  Life 
towards  Him  who  is  the  Light  of  the  "World  is 
determined  by  his  attitude  in  this  life  towards 
the  imperfect  light  of  Conscience  that  he  has. 
"  If  the  Gentiles  who  have  not  the  Law  do  by 
nature  the  things  contained  in  the  Law,  these 
having  not  the  Law  are  a  law  unto  themselves, 
which  show  the  works  of  the  Law  written  in 
their  hearts,  their  Conscience  bearing  witness  " 
(Eom.  ii.  14). 

"We  may  assume  that  St.  Paul  means  that  the 
heathen  man  who  in  this  life  followed  the  dim 
light  of  his  conscience  is  the  man  who  will  re 
joice  in  the  full  light  when  it  comes  and  that 
the  man  who  has  been  wilfully  shutting  out 
that  dim  light  of  conscience  here  is  thereby 
rendering  himself  less  capable  of  accepting  the 
fuller  light  when  he  meets  it  hereafter.  In 
other  words  this  life  is  his  probation,  he  is 
forming  on  earth  the  moral  bent  of  his  future 
life. 

"We  may  assume  the  same  of  men  in  similar 
conditions  in  Christian  lands,  men  brought  up 
amid  ignorance  and  crime,  men  brought  up  in 
infidel  homes,  men  to  whom  Christ  has  been 
so  unattractively  presented  that  they  saw  no 


142  The  Near  Hereafter 

beauty  in  Him  or  even  instinctively  turned 
away  from  Him  impelled  by  their  conscience. 
They  all  have  the  light  of  God  in  some  degree 
and  by  their  attitude  towards  the  right  that 
they  know  are  determining  on  earth  their  atti 
tude  towards  God  in  the  Hereafter.  They  are 
forming  character  and  character  tends  to  perma 
nence. 

The  "  outer  darkness  "  it  would  seem  comes 
not  from  absence  of  light  but  from  blindness  of 
sight.  The  joy  of  Heaven  is  impossible  to  the 
unholy  just  as  the  joy  of  beautiful  scenery  to 
the  blind  or  the  joy  of  exquisite  music  to  the 
deaf.  Probation  in  this  life — simply  means 
that  in  this  first  stage  of  his  being  a  man 
either  is  or  is  not  blinding  his  eyes  and  dulling 
his  ears  and  hardening  his  heart  so  as  to  make 
himself  incapable  of  higher  things  in  the  life  to 
come. 

If  then  it  be  possible  even  for  a  heathen  to 
have  in  this  life  sufficient  probation  to  deter 
mine  his  attitude  towards  God  for  ever,  how 
much  more  for  a  man  in  the  full  light  of  Chris 
tianity.  In  view  of  this  the  great  law  of  life 

that  CHARACTER  TENDS  TO  PERMANENCE  may 

it  not  be  awfully  true  that  a  man  who  with  full 


Probation  in  This  Life  143 

Knowledge  of  Christ  wilfully  and  deliberately 
turns  from  Him  all  through  this  life,  should 
thus  render  himself  incapable  of  turning  to 
Him  in  any  other  lif e  ?  With  full  knowledge 
of  Christ  I  say,  not  with  knowledge  of  some 
repulsive  misrepresentation  of  Christ. 

For  think  what  it  means  to  reject  Christ  wil 
fully  with  full  knowledge  of  Him. 

His  voice  still  comes  as  we  tramp  on, 
With,  a  sorrowful  fall  in  its  pleading  tone  : 
4 '  Thou  wilt  tire  in  the  dreary  ways  of  sin  j 
I  left  My  home  to  bring  thee  in. 
In  its  golden  street  are  no  weary  feet, 
Its  rest  is  pleasant,  its  songs  are  sweet." 
And  we  shout  back  angrily  hurrying  on 
To  a  terrible  home  where  rest  is  none  : 
"  We  want  not  your  city's  golden  street, 
Nor  to  hear  its  constant  soDg ! ' ' 
And  still  Christ  keeps  on  loving  us,  loving  all  along. 

Eejected  still  He  pursues  each  one : 

"My  child,  what  more  could  thy  God  have 

done? 

Thy  sin  hid  the  light  of  heaven  from  Me, 
When  alone  in  the  darkness  I  died  for  thee. 
Thy  sin  of  to-day  in  its  shadow  lay 
Between  My  face  and  One  turned  away." 
And  we  stop  and  turn  for  a  moment's  space 
To  fling  back  that  love  in  the  Saviour's  face, 


144  The  Near  Hereafter 

To  give  His  heart  yet  another  grief, 

And  glory  in  the  wrong. 

And  still  Christ  keeps  on  loving  us}  loving  all  along. 

Is  it  hard  to  believe  that  a  man  thus  know 
ing  Christ  and  wilfully  rejecting  Him  should 
thereby  risk  the  ruin  of  his  soul  ?  Can  we  not 
recognize  this  awful  law  of  life  that  wilful  sin 
against  light  tends  to  darkening  of  the  light — 
that  every  rejection  of  God  and  good  draws 
blood  as  it  were  on  the  spiritual  retina,  that  a 
life  of  such  rejections  of  the  light  tends  to  make 
one  incapable  of  receiving  the  light  for  ever. 

If  this  be  so  it  is  not  at  all  fair  to  misrepre 
sent  it  by  saying  that  God  cruelly  stereotypes  a 
man's  soul  at  death  and  will  refuse  him  per 
mission  to  repent  after  death  however  much  he 
may  want  to.  The  voice  of  the  Holy  Ghost 
within  tells  us  that  this  could  never  be  true  of 
the  Father.  We  must  believe  that  through  all 
Eternity,  if  the  worst  sinner  felt  touched  by  the 
love  of  God  and  wanted  to  turn  to  Him,  that 
man  would  be  saved.  What  we  dread  is  that 
the  man  may  not  want  to  do  so,  may  have  ren 
dered  himself  incapable  of  doing  so.  We  dread 
not  God's  will,  but  the  man's  own  will. 

Character  tends  to  permanence.     Free  will  is 


Probation  in  This  Life  145 

a  glorious  but  a  dangerous  prerogative.  All 
experience  leads  towards  the  belief  that  a  hu 
man  will  may  so  distort  itself  as  to  grow  in 
capable  of  good.  Even  a  character  not  har 
dened  into  permanent  evil  may  grow  incapable 
of  the  highest  good.  A  soul  even  forgiven 
through  the  mercy  of  God  may  "  enter  into  life 
halt  and  maimed "  like  a  consumptive  patient 
cured  of  his  disease  but  going  through  life  with 
only  one  lung. 


Though  the  Bible  does  not  give  an  absolutely 
definite  pronouncement  on  this  question,  yet  the 
general  trend  of  its  teaching  leads  to  the  belief 
that  this  life  is  our  probation  time.  It  every 
where  calls  for  immediate  repentance.  And 
St.  Paul  says  that  the  Judgment  is  for  deeds 
"  done  in  the  body"  and  there  are  such  hints  as 
"  the  door  was  shut "  and  "  there  is  a  sin  unto 
death,"  and  "  it  were  better  for  a  man  not  to 
have  known  the  way  of  righteousness  than  after 
he  has  known  it  to  turn  from  it."  !  And  this 

1 1  have  not  quoted  such  texts  as  "  Where  the  tree  falleth 
there  it  shall  lie,"  which  no  sensible  student  now  uses  in  this 
connection,  nor  even  the  well-known  text, ' '  Behold  now  is  the 
acceptable  time,  behold  now  is  the  day  of  salvation,"  for  the 


146  The  Near  Hereafter 

has  been  the  general  belief  of  the  Church  in  all 
ages.  Even  in  all  the  hopeful  words  of  the 
ancient  Fathers  about  Christ  preaching  to  the 
spirits  in  prison  who  in  the  dark  old  world  days 
"  had  sometime  been  disobedient,"  we  have  seen 
that  they  add  some  such  significant  phrase  as 
"  that  He  might  convert  those  who  were  capable 
of  turning  to  Him.  (See  Chapter  IY,  p.  60.) 
And  human  experience  of  character  tending  to 
permanence  makes  this  fact  of  human  proba 
tion  awfully  probable.  There  is  nothing  in 
Scripture  nor  in  its  interpretation  by  the  Church, 
nor  in  human  experience,  to  conflict  with  the 
statement  that  in  this  life  Acts  make  habits  and 
Habits  make  Character  and  character  makes 
Destiny. 

What  new  discoveries  of  God's  power  and 
mercy  may  await  us  in  eternity  we  cannot  know, 
but  from  all  we  do  know  we  are  justified  in 
thinking  that  (in  the  sense  which  I  have  stated) 
a  man's  life  in  this  world  determines  his  des 
tiny — at  any  rate  that  a  man  who  presumes 

"acceptable  time  "  and  "the  day  of  salvation  "  mean  here 
not  the  present  life  of  each  man  but  the  present  Christian 
dispensation.  St.  Paul  is  quoting  Isaiah's  prophecy  of  Christ 
of  the  acceptable  time  and  the  day  of  salvation,  and  he  says 
this  time  has  come  now  in  this  Christian  dispensation. 


Probation  in  This  Life  147 

recklessly  on  chances  in  the  future  is  taking 
terrible  risks.  The  Bible  gives  no  encourage 
ment  to  hope  that  one  who  with  full  knowledge 
of  Christ  keeps  on  wilfully  rejecting  Him  all 
through  this  life  will  be  able  to  turn  to  Him  in 
any  other  life. 

The  only  comfort  we  dare  offer  to  anxious 
mourners  grieving  over  sinful  friends  departed 
is  that  God  only  is  the  judge  of  what  constitutes 
irrevocable  rejection  of  good,  that  we  cannot 
tell  who  has  irrevocably  "  done  despite  to  the 
Spirit  of  grace,"  and  that  the  deep  love  and 
pain  of  Christ  for  sinful  men  remains  for  ever 
and  ever.  We  may  tell  the  poor  mother  that 
her  deep  love  and  pain  for  her  dead  son  is  but 
a  faint  shadow  of  the  deep  love  and  pain  of  God 
— that  no  one  will  be  surprised  or  trapped  in 
his  ignorance — that  no  one  will  be  lost  whom  it 
is  possible  for  God  to  save — that  no  one  will  be 
lost  until  "  the  Heavenly  Father  has  as  it  were 
thrown  His  arms  around  him  and  looked  him 
full  in  the  face  with  the  bright  eyes  of  His  love, 
and  that  of  his  own  deliberate  will  he  would 
not  have  Him  "  (Faber). 

We  dare  not  minimize  what  the  love  and 
pain  of  God  may  do,  but  we  dare  not  presume 


148  The  Near  Hereafter 

in  the  face  of  Scripture  to  lighten  the  awful 
responsibility  which  this  life  brings. 

Thus  we  reach  larger  thoughts  of  God's 
dealings  with  man  and  deeper  interest  in  the 
infinite  variety  that  must  be  in  the  "  many  man 
sions"  of  the  boundless  life  hereafter.  And 
this  sets  us  wondering  about  another  thought 
as  to  ministry  in  that  life. 


CHAPTER  XI 
MINISTBY  IN  THE  UNSEEN  LIFE 

§1 

IS  it  allowable  here  to  make  a  venture  of 
faith  and  speculate  on  a  matter  of  which 
we  cannot  give  definite  proof  ?    There  is 
a  beautiful  old  allegory  of  KNOWLEDGE,  the 
strong  mailed  knight,  tramping  over  the  great 
table-land  thai*  he  surveyed,  and  testing  and 
making  his  ground  sure  at  every  step,  while 
beside  him,  just  above  the  ground,  moved  the 
white-winged  angel  FAITH. 

Side  by  side  they  moved,  till  the  path  broke 
short  off  on  the  verge  of  a  vast  precipice. 
Knowledge  could  go  no  further.  There  was 
no  footing  for  the  ponderous  knight ;  but  the 
white- winged  angel  rose  majestically  from  the 
ground  and  moved  across  the  chasm,  where  her 
companion  could  not  follow. 

Our  path  has  broken  off — knowledge  can  go 

no  further.     May  we  speculate  with  faith  on 

something  we  cannot  prove?    I  am  thinking 

of  a  speculation  very  dear  to  myself,  about  that 

149 


150  The  Near  Hereafter 

progress  of  our  dear  ones  in  the  presence  of 
Christ.  Will  not  much  of  that  progress  in  the 
life  beyond  come  through  unselfish  ministry  to 
others?  Let  us  see  what  reason  there  is  to 
hope  it. 

Think  of  all  the  true  hearts  who  have  lived 
on  earth  the  Christ  life  of  unselfish  helpfulness. 
Can  you  imagine  them  never  helping  any  one 
there,  where  growth  in  love  is  God's  highest 
aim  for  them  ? 

Think  of  our  Lord's  mysterious  preaching  in 
the  Life  after  Death  and  remember  that  some 
of  the  best  known  teachers  of  the  early  Church 
believed  that  the  apostles  and  others  had  fol 
lowed  His  example.  (See  Chapter  IY,  p.  59.) 

Think  that  there  are  countless  millions  in  the 
World  of  the  Departed  born  in  heathen  lands, 
born  in  Christian  lands,  who  had  no  chance  on 
earth  of  knowing  Christ  in  a  way  to  win  their 
love  for  Him. 

Think,  how  shall  His  command  be  fulfilled 
by  His  Church,  "  Go  preach  the  good  news  to 
every  creature  " — EVERY  creature.  What  a 
mockery  it  seems  with  the  heathen  dying  half 
a  million  every  week  if  no  work  for  Christ  goes 
on  in  the  Unseen!  If  millions  of  those  Hin- 


Ministry  in  the  Unseen  Life       151 

doos  who  have  died  without  the  Gospel  would 
have  accepted  it,  do  you  think  it  is  not  being 
taught  to  any  of  them  now  ?  If  the  men  of 
ancient  Tyre  and  Sidon  would  have  repented  at 
the  teaching  and  work  of  Christ,  if  the  mighty 
works  had  been  done  in  them,  do  you  not  think 
He  has  taken  care  since  that  the  men  of  Tyre 
and  Sidon  should  have  their  chance  ?  If 
the  heathen  Socrates,  and  Plato,  and  Marcus 
Aurelius,  and  Epictetus  would  have  fallen  at 
His  feet  as  their  Master  and  Friend — and  you 
know  they  would — do  you  think  they  have  not 
learned  to  know  Him  by  now  ?  If  honest 
hearts  in  our  own  land  who  have  died  repelled 
from  Him  through  their  ignorance  and  through 
stupid  misrepresentations  would  have  loved 
Him  if  they  knew  Him  as  He  really  is,  do  you 
think  that  no  one  is  helping  them  to  understand 
Him  now  ?  Can  we  doubt  that  somehow  within 
the  Veil  they  will  learn  more  fully  of  His  tender 
love?  And  judging  from  what  we  know  of 
God's  methods  on  earth,  is  it  unreasonable  to 
think  that  they  will  learn  it  from  their  brethren  ? 
True,  God  might  help  them  by  means  of  the 
angels.  But  in  God's  dealings  with  men's  souls 
on  earth  not  angels  but  men  were  the  helpers 


152  The  Near  Hereafter 

He  gave  them.  Even  in  the  stupendous  miracle 
of  the  conversion  of  St.  Paul  it  was  a  man 
(Ananias)  whom  God  sent  to  help  him. 

§2 

Here  comes  an  interesting  question  about  the 
doctrine  of  Election.  To  the  generation  before 
ns  it  was  a  horrible  doctrine  clashing  with  all 
sense  of  fairness  or  right.  Men  said  it  meant 
that  God  decreed  certain  men  to  eternal  Heaven 
and  certain  others  to  eternal  Hell  by  His  own 
arbitrary  will.  The  stern  revolt  of  Conscience 
at  length  sent  us  back  to  study  our  Bibles  more 
carefully.  We  found  that  in  the  first  recorded 
case  of  election  Abraham  was  called  for  the 
good  of  others  "  that  in  thee  and  in  thy  seed 
shall  all  the  families  of  the  earth  be  blessed." 

"We  saw  reason  to  believe  that  Abraham's 
case  was  a  type  of  all  other  elect — elect  for  the 
service  of  others.  We  found  that  the  Bible  con 
sistently  and  throughout  affirms  that  when 
"  God  calls  or  separates  one  man  to  Himself  it 
is  for  the  good  of  other  men ;  that  when  He 
selects  one  family  it  is  that  all  families  should 
be  blessed ;  that  when  He  chooses  one  nation  it 
is  for  the  welfare  of  all  nations ;  that  when  He 


Ministry  in  the  Unseen  Life       153 

elects  and  establishes  a  church  it  is  for  the 
spiritual  benefit  of  the  world.  No  man,  no 
family,  no  nation,  no  church  possesses  any  gift 
or  privilege  or  superior  capacity  or  power  for 
its  own  use  and  welfare  alone  but  for  the  gen 
eral  good."  So  we  learned  that  God's  word  is 
true  in  spite  of  our  stupid  misunderstanding  of 
it  and  that  this  doctrine  of  Election  rightly 
understood  is  one  of  the  noblest  things  in  the 
whole  Bible. 

Now  comes  my  question.  Are  God's  elect  in 
the  Hereafter  life  still  "  elect  for  the  service  of 
others  "  ?  Are  those  loving  souls  who  are  joy 
fully  accepting  Christ's  service  here, — destined 
for  a  still  more  glorious  service  in  this  ministry 
in  the  Unseen — the  "first-fruits"  of  a  great 
harvest  which  through  them  the  Lord  will  reap 
in  the  Hereafter?  Will  some  be  just  saved, 
saved  so  as  by  fire,  saved  "  by  the  skin  of  their 
teeth,"  as  we  say,  missing  the  noble  destiny  of 
the  "  elect,"  the  joy  of  being  a  blessing  to  their 
race? 


"  You  have  preached  your  last  sermon,"  said 
one  to  Frederick  Denison  Maurice  as  he  was 


154  The  Near  Hereafter 

dying.  "  Aye,"  he  said ;  "  but  only  my  last 
sermon  in  THIS  life."  He  believed  he  was  going 
through  the  veil  to  preach  to  men.  I  believe 
it  too,  though  I  cannot  prove  it,  nay,  even 
though  there  be  difficulties  in  the  way  of  be 
lieving  it.  And  many  men  greater  than  we 
are  believing  it,  impelled  by  the  stirring  of 
Divine  impulses  within. 

Do  not  think  of  it  as  merely  a  work  for 
preachers  and  teachers.  Every  brave  boy  here 
who  is  trying  to  do  right,  every  poor  woman 
who  is  learning  to  love,  every  one  who  is  bless 
ing  the  world  by  kindly  unselfishness,  is  help 
ing  on  the  Kingdom  of  God  on  earth  and  will 
be  helping  on  the  Kingdom  of  God  beyond. 

Surely  there  will  be  scope  for  them  all. 
When  you  think  of  that  great  mingled  crowd 
that  is  daily  passing  through  the  gates  of  death, 
all  sorts  and  conditions — from  the  strong  saints 
of  God  to  the  poor  children  brought  up  in 
homes  of  sin — you  need  have  little  doubt  that 
there  is  room  for  service. 

If  it  be  true,  ah  !  think  of  it,  you  who  are 
trying  to  forget  yourselves,  and  live  for  others 
— think  of  the  blessedness  of  your  life  in  the 
waiting  land.  With  the  weak  and  the  ignorant 


Ministry  in  the  Unseen  Life       155 

needing  to  be  helped ;  with  the  little  children 
needing  to  be  mothered  and  loved ;  with  the 
great  heathen  world,  who  have  gone  within  the 
veil,  never  yet  having  heard  of  Christ. 

§4 

If  it  be  true,  think  how  it  takes  away  the  re 
proach  of  "  glorified  selfishness,"  which  many 
attribute  to  the  Christians'  glad  hope. 

Think  how  it  helps  in  the  perplexities  about 
God's  dealings  when  young  and  useful  lives 
are  taken  from  the  earth.  An  angry  mourner 
said  to  me  recently,  "  I  don't  believe  God  has 
anything  to  do  with  it,  else  why  should  He  take 
away  a  noble  life  like  that  and  leave  all  these 
stupid  useless  people  in  the  world  ? "  I  told 
him  of  my  hope  of  this  ministry  in  the  Unseen 
and  suggested  that  perhaps  God  did  not  want 
ONLY  the  stupid  useless  people. 

And  think  especially  how  it  deepens  the  im 
portance  of  our  life  on  earth  to  feel  that  it  has 
a  bearing  on  our  usefulness  for  ever.  The  more 
we  increase  our  talents  here,  the  more  we  shall 
be  able  to  help  our  Saviour  there.  He  Himself 
suggests  this  in  the  parables  of  the  Talents  and 
the  Pounds.  "  Thy  pound  has  gained  five,  I 


156  The  Near  Hereafter 

will  set  thee  over  five  cities.  Thy  pound  has 
gained  ten,  I  will  set  thee  over  ten  cities.  I 
will  give  thee  a  larger  and  nobler  work  here 
after."  Is  not  that  an  incentive  to  stir  one's 
blood  ?  The  more  I  grow  in  love,  in  unselfish 
ness,  in  knowledge  of  God,  in  righteousness  of 
life,  the  more  use  I  shall  be  to  my  dear  Lord 
and  to  my  brethren  for  ever. 


CHAPTER  XII 
CONCLUSION 

SO  we  close  our  thoughts  about  the  NEAR 
HEEEAFTEE,  the  life  immediately  after 
death.    The  FAE  Hereafter — the  great 
mystery  of  Judgment  and  Hell  and  Heaven  be 
longs  to  a  later  section.    Here  we  have  been 
dealing  only  with  the  life  going  on  to-day  in  the 
Unseen — side  by  side  with  our  present  life. 

Ah!  that  wonderful  Paradise  land — that 
wonderful  Church  of  God  in  the  Unseen — with 
its  vast  numbers,  with  its  enthusiastic  love,  with 
all  its  grand  leaders  who  have  been  trained  on 
earth.  WE  AND  THEY  together  form  the  great 
continuous  Church  of  God.  "We  are  all  ONE 
LONG  PEOCESSION  ;  they  at  the  head  in  the 
Unseen.  What  a  life  it  is  1  What  a  work  it 
has! 

Said  I  not  well  it  was  a  Gospel  of  the  Here 
after,  a  good  news  of  God !    It  will  make  you 
solemn  as  you  feel  that  character  passes  on  un- 
157 


158  The  Near  Hereafter 

changed.  That  is  good ;  but  it  will  do  more.  It 
will  take  away  the  sting  and  the  horror  of  death. 
It  is  not  the  pain  of  dying  that  makes  that 
horror  when  I  come  to  die.  After  all,  men 
bear  far  more  pain  without  flinching.  It  is  not 
merely  the  parting  for  the  present  with  those  I 
love.  We  have  constantly  to  do  that  when  they 
go  to  other  lands  without  breaking  our  hearts 
about  it.  It  is  not  even  any  doubt  about  a 
future  Eesurrection  at  the  Second  Advent.  I 
may  believe  that,  and  yet  get  little  comfort 
from  it.  That  Advent  seems  so  far  away.  It 
may  be  next  week ;  but  it  may  be  5,000  years 
hence,  and  meantime  what  of  my  life  ?  Sleep, 
unconsciousness,  darkness  ?  What  ?  JSTo  won 
der  I  should  shrink  from  that  mysterious  un 
known. 

But  teach  me  the  ancient  Scriptural  doctrine 
of  the  PARADISE  life  as  it  appears  in  the  Bible. 
Teach  me  that  in  the  hour  after  death  I  shall 
pass  into  the  Unseen  with  myself,  with  my  full 
life,  my  feelings,  my  character,  my  individuality, 
and  in  that  solemn  hour  death  will  lose  its 
horror.  Is  not  that  a  Gospel  ? 

In  the  awful  days  of  bereavement  it  will 
bring  God's  peace,  and  it  will  bring  elevation 


Conclusion  159 

of  character.     "  Where  your  treasure  is,  there 
will  your  heart  be  also." 

"  He  is  not  dead,  the  child  of  your  affection, 

But  gone  into  that  school 
Where  he  no  longer  needs  your  poor  protection, 
And  Christ  Himself  doth  rule." 

You  think  of  your  boy  as  serving  at  one  side 
of  the  veil,  and  you  at  the  other ;  each  in  the 
presence  of  Christ.  You  think  how  he  is  being 
lovingly  trained  and  disciplined.  How  all  his 
abilities  are  being  used  in  self-sacrificing  deeds 
for  others.  JSTot  in  a  glorified  selfishness  in 
thanking  God  that  he  is  safe,  though  his  breth 
ren  be  lost.  Ah,  no  !  but  in  perfect  self-sacri 
fice,  even  as  his  Lord.  You  think  of  him  as 
learning  to  fight  for  righteousness — to  help  the 
weak,  aye,  mayhap,  to  go  out — God's  brave 
young  knight — out  into  the  darkness  after  some 
one  who  has  missed  of  Christ  on  earth.  Realize 
that  and  your  whole  life  must  perforce  grow 
nobler.  And  realize  that  you  will  not  have  to 
wait  for  the  Resurrection  or  the  Advent  to 
meet  him  and  learn  all. 

When  your  death  comes,  he  will  be  waiting 
for  you.  He  has  been  praying  and  watching 
over  you.  He  will  tell  you  of  all  that  has  been 


160  The  Near  Hereafter 

happening.  And  together  in  Christ's  loving 
presence,  side  by  side,  you  will  work  and  wait, 
and  help  your  brethren ;  and  look  forward  to 
the  glory  of  the  heaven  that  is  still  in  the  fu 
ture.  Is  not  that  a  Gospel  worth  the  preaching 
— a  Gospel  to  stir  our  souls  and  to  comfort  our 
hearts  for  those  "  whom  we  have  loved  long 
since  and  lost  a  while  "  ? 

Thank  God  for  the  blessed  doctrine  of  the 
Paradise  life ! 

Thank  God  for  all  His  poor  penitent  servants 
departed  this  life  in  His  faith  and  fear ! 


PART  II 
The  Far  Hereafter 


I 

THE  JUDGMENT 

WE  touch  lightly  on  the  subject  of  the 
FAK  Hereafter  which  is  still  away 
in  the  future  for  all  humanity. 
One  day  the  Intermediate  Life  will  close. 
The  end  of  this  age  will  come  at  the  Second 
Advent.  And  at  this  crisis  our  Lord  places 
the  great  drama  of  the  Judgment  and  the 
final  decision  of  each  man's  destiny.  Whether 
it  will  be  a  great  spectacular  event  such  as 
His  picture  suggests,  with  all  humanity  as 
sembled  and  the  Judge  on  the  great  White 
Throne,  or  whether  His  picture  is  figurative,  we 
cannot  affirm.  We  can  only  gather  that  it  will 
be  a  final  judgment  and  that  it  will  be  a  judg 
ment  according  to  finally  developed  character, 
when  men  shall  be  clearly  seen  to  belong  to  the 
right  hand  or  the  left,  the  sheep  or  the  goats, 
to  the  wheat  or  the  tares,  to  the  good  fish  to  bo 
gathered  up  or  the  bad  fish  to  be  thrown  away. 
Then  come  the  final  stages  in  the  history  of 
humanity,  Hell  and  Heaven. 
163 


n 

HELL 

HEEE  we  touch  the  awful  part  of  our 
study.  In  Christ's  great  drama  of  the 
Judgment  those  on  the  left  hand  are 
passing  out  into  the  darkness,  and  we  see  them 
no  more.  In  that  darkness  there  seems  no  ray 
of  hope.  So  far  as  we  can  learn,  it  means  irrev 
ocable  ruin  and  loss.  In  spite  of  God's  love 
and  pain  for  them  on  Earth  and  in  Hades,  they 
seem  at  last  to  have  destroyed  in  themselves 
everything  of  good,  and  so  placed  themselves 
beyond  possibility  of  restoration  for  ever.  The 
judgment  has  clearly  the  ring  of  finality. 
There  seems  nothing  more  to  be  said.  And  so, 
with  pain  in  our  hearts  responding  to  the  pain 
of  the  Father,  we  are  forced  to  leave  them  in 
the  darkness  and  mystery  in  which  Scripture 
enshrouds  them. 

This  is,  I  think,  all  that  can  justifiably  be 
said.  The  reticence  and  reserve  of  Scripture 
forbids  any  definite  doctrine  of  Hell. 

And  this  is  all  that  would  have  needed  to  be 
164 


Hell  165 

said  if  men  had  kept  to  that  reticence  and  re 
serve  of  Scripture,  and  to  all  further  question 
ings  contented  themselves  with  the  answer  that 
the  Judge  of  all  the  earth  will  do  right.  But 
they  have  not  so  contented  themselves.  It  is 
hard  to  blame  them.  For  beyond  the  main 
facts  about  the  doom  of  the  impenitent  there 
are  here  and  there  through  the  Bible  many  tan 
talizing  hints  perplexing  and  difficult  to  recon 
cile  with  each  other,  but  very  tempting  to  fol 
low  out.  By  emphasizing  certain  of  these  and  ig 
noring  or  dwelling  more  lightly  on  certain  others 
which  seem  to  contradict  them,  men  have  for 
mulated  definite  doctrines  about  Hell,  differing 
widely  from  each  other  but  each  with  apparently 
strong  Scriptural  support.  This  is  only  what 
may  happen  in  any  department  of  study.  The 
strict  rule  of  evidence  in  any  enquiry  is  that 
all  the  facts  must  be  studied  and  that  no 
theory  shall  be  accepted  as  entirely  trust 
worthy  while  any  of  the  evidence  remains 
unaccounted  for. 

There  are  three  theories  which  hold  the 
ground  to-day,  each  of  them  seemingly  with 
much  evidence  in  its  favour,  but  each  of  them 


166  The  Far  Hereafter 

seriously  unsatisfactory  as  conflicting  with  other 
evidence. 

(1)  The  theory  of  Everlasting  Torment — 
that  every  soul  which  has  missed  of  Christ  shall 
be  plunged  into  a  Hell  of  torment  and  sin  for 
ever  and  ever,  growing  worse  and  worse  and 
lower  and  lower  through  all  the  ages  of  Eternity. 

(2)  The  theory  of  Universalism— that  in  the 
ages  of  the  far  future  through  the  stern  loving 
discipline  of  God  all  men  shall  at  length  be 
saved. 

(3)  The  theory  of  Conditional  Immortality 
— that  all  souls  who  fail  of  Eternal  Life  shall 
be  punished  not  by  Everlasting  Torment,  but 
by  annihilation  and  the  loss  of  God  and  Heaven 
for  ever. 

At  first  sight  it  seems  almost  impossible 
that  such  conflicting  theories  could  be  formed 
out  of  the  same  Bible.  But  a  little  considera 
tion  of  the  evidence  and  of  the  power  of  pre 
judice  and  preconceptions  in  estimating  evi 
dence  makes  it  easier  to  understand. 

The  main  trend  of  all  Scripture  teaching  is 
that  it  shall  be  well,  gloriously  well,  with  the 
good,  and  that  it  shall  be  evil,  unutterably  evil, 


Hell  167 

with  the  wicked.  That  there  is  a  mysterious 
and  awful  malignity  attaching  to  sin — that  to 
be  in  sin  means  to  be  in  misery  and  ruin  in  this 
life  or  any  other  life — and  that  sin  persisted  in 
tends  to  utter  and  irretrievable  ruin.  No  argu 
ments  about  the  love  and  power  of  God  to  save 
to  the  uttermost  can  cancel  the  fact  of  the  free 
will  of  man  or  the  plain  statements  of  Scripture 
confirmed  beyond  question  by  the  loving  Lord 
Himself  as  to  the  awful  fate  of  the  finally  im 
penitent. 

But  running  through  all  this  dark  back 
ground  of  Scripture  is  a  curious  golden  thread 
of  prophecy  that  evil  shall  not  be  eternal  in 
God's  universe.  One  turns  to  it  perplexed 
with  wondering  hope.  For  however  fully  Con 
science  recognizes  the  righteousness  of  a  terrible 
retribution  for  sin,  there  is  in  all  thoughtful 
minds  a  shrinking  from  the  thought  that  Evil 
shall  be  as  permanent  as  Good  in  the  universe 
of  the  All-holy  God — that  any  evil  power  can 
exist  unendingly  side  by  side  with  Him  and  un 
endingly  resist  Him ;  that  Hell  and  Heaven, 
Satan  and  God  shall  co-exist  for  all  eternity. 
This  is  almost  unthinkable  to  thoughtful  men. 
It  is  a  Dualism  repugnant  to  all  our  ideals 


l68  The  Far  Hereafter 

of  God.  And  this  golden  thread,  running 
through  the  Old  and  New  Testaments  alike, 
confirms  this  thought,  in  its  dim  vision  of  a 
golden  age  somewhere  away  in  the  far  future — 
away  it  would  seem  beyond  the  dark  vision  of 
Hell — when  evil  shall  have  vanished  out  of  the 
Universe  for  ever  and  "  God  shall  be  all  in  all  " 
(1  Cor.  xv.  28) — when  there  shall  come  "  the 
times  of  the  Restoration  of  all  things  which 
God  hath  promised  by  the  mouth  of  all  His 
holy  prophets  since  the  world  began"  (Acts 
iii.  21). 

Naturally  there  is  danger  of  people  empha 
sizing  strongly  either  one  of  these  trends  of 
Scripture  and  gathering  certain  proof  texts  ac 
cording  to  their  own  prejudices  and  preconcep 
tions  of  what  ought  to  be.  "  The  way  in  which 
some  people  read  their  Bibles,"  says  Mr.  Ruskin, 
"  is  like  the  way  in  which  the  old  monks  thought 
that  hedgehogs  ate  grapes.  They  rolled  them 
selves  over  the  grapes  as  they  lay  on  the  ground 
and  whatever  first  stuck  to  their  spikes  they 
carried  off  and  ate."  If  the  grapes  are  of  vari 
ous  kinds  as  are  the  passages  of  Scripture  we 
cannot  judge  thus  of  the  taste  of  the  vintage. 


Hell  169 

To  get  the  true  taste  of  the  grapes  we  must 
press  them  in  cluster.  To  get  the  true  mean 
ing  of  Scripture  we  must  study  the  whole  trend 
of  Scripture.  Before  we  can  accept  any  doc 
trine  from  separate  passages  of  Scripture  we 
must  assure  ourselves  that  it  is  in  harmony,  not 
only  with  other  passages  but  also  with  the 
ruling  thoughts  which  run  through  all  Scripture, 
God's  unutterable  holiness,  God's  awful  hatred 
of  sin  and  stern  denunciations  of  doom  against 
the  impenitent,  God's  love,  God's  unchangeable- 
ness,  God's  reasonableness  and  fairness,  and  the 
mysterious  golden  thread  of  hope  which  runs 
through  all. 

ISTow  we  glance  as  briefly  as  possible  at  the 
three  theories  referred  to. 

I 

The  theory  of  Everlasting  Torment  and  Ever 
lasting  Sin. 

This  theory  keeps  with  Scripture  in  assert 
ing  the  fatal  and  irrevocable  result  of  unre- 
pented  sin — but  it  goes  beyond  the  reserve  of 
Scripture  in  defining  that  result  and  so  defin 
ing  it  as  to  impugn  the  character  of  God.  It 
teaches  that  all  who  are  condemned  in  the 


170  The  Far  Hereafter 

Judgment  are  doomed  to  a  life  of  endless  tor 
ment,  in  the  company  of  devils — forsaken  of 
God.  Millions  of  millions  of  ages  shall  see  this 
punishment  no  whit  nearer  to  its  end.  It  must 
go  on  for  ever  and  ever  and  ever. 

It  takes  perhaps  a  child's  or  a  woman's  heart 
to  realize  the  horror  of  that  thought.  I  remem 
ber  as  a  child  reading  a  Sunday-school  book  that 
helped  me  to  realize  the  meaning  of  this  "  for 
ever  and  ever  in  hell."  I  was  to  imagine  a  huge 
forest,  and  a  tiny  insect  coming  from  the  farthest 
planet  and  biting  an  atom  out  of  one  of  the 
leaves,  and  carrying  it  away  to  his  home,  the 
journey  taking  one  thousand  years.  Then  I 
was  to  imagine  the  ages  that  must  elapse  before 
that  whole  leaf  was  carried  off.  Then  the  stu 
pendous  time  before  the  whole  tree  would  be 
gone.  Then,  as  my  brain  reeled  at  the  thought, 
I  was  to  look  forward  to  the  carrying  away  of 
the  whole  forest,  and  from  that  to  the  carrying 
away  of  the  whole  world.  Then  came  the  aw 
ful  sentence  in  italics,  Even  then  eternity  would 
lut  have  ~begun.  I  suppose  God  will  forgive  the 
people  who  wrote  that  book  for  children  if  they 
repent,  but  I  don't  feel  much  like  forgiving 
them.  I  can  remember  still  lying  awake  in  the 


Hell  171 

night  and  crying  as  I  thought  of  the  lost  souls 
in  Hell  as  my  poor  little  brain  reeled  at  the 
thought  of  the  journeys  of  that  wretched  insect 
and  of  those  whom  God  kept  alive  to  suffer  for 
ever  and  ever  and  ever. 

Then  as  one  grew  older  came  the  further 
horror  that  these  "  lost "  are  kept  alive  not  only 
to  suffer  but  to  sin  everlastingly.  They  are  to 
go  on  increasing  in  sin  for  ever  and  ever  and 
ever  in  the  universe  of  the  All-holy  God. 
One  tests  this  by  the  ruling  thoughts  of  Scrip 
ture.  One  thinks  of  God's  holiness.  One 
thinks  of  the  golden  thread  of  hope.  One 
wonders  what  it  means  that  Christ  came  to 
"  destroy  the  works  of  the  devil " 1  and  to  des 
troy  the  devil  (bruise  the  serpent's  head 2)  and 
how  one  day  "God  shall  be  all  in  all"  if 
straight  opposite  for  all  eternity  shall  be  Sa 
tan's  Kingdom  of  misery  and  sin.  Surely 
Christ  has  not  failed !  And  yet — and  yet — 
what  shall  we  say?  And  what  shall  we  say 
of  God's  fatherhood  ?  Shall  we  say  as  some 
do  that  as  Judge  He  must  do  cruel  things 
which  as  Father  He  would  shrink  from  ?  God 
forbid !  The  Judge  and  the  Father  are  one. 
*1  Johniii.  8.  2Gen.  iii.  15. 


172  The  Far  Hereafter 

Men  would  never  use  such  sophistry  about  the 
character  of  God  if  it  were  put  into  plain 
words.  "  Ye  must  ken,"  said  a  godly  old  Scotch 
man,  "  that  the  Almighty  may  often  have  to  do 
in  His  offeeshial  capacity  what  He  would  scorn 
to  do  as  a  private  individual ! "  I  quote  this 
not  with  flippancy  but  with  stern  indignation. 
That  is  baldly  what  such  sophistry  means. 

Clearly  one  who  insists  on  this  doctrine  ought 
at  least  to  be  absolutely  certain  that  Scripture 
leaves  him  no  escape  from  it.  Now  the  con 
clusion  which  a  thorough  study  of  the  question 
leads  to  is  this : — that  Scripture  nowhere  defi 
nitely  affirms  that  the  sufferings  of  the  lost 
shall  not  be  everlasting,  and  nowhere  defi 
nitely  affirms  that  they  shall  le  everlasting. 

Even  that  if  it  be  true  is  some  relief.  We 
should  no  longer  be  forced  to  believe  of  God 
what  Conscience  declares  to  be  unworthy  of 
Him.  But  is  it  true  ?  I  can  already  see  the 
Bible  turned  over  for  the  dark  array  of  texts 
beginning  with  "  He  that  believeth  not  shall  be 
damned,"  "  How  can  ye  escape  the  damnation 
of  Hell?"  "These  shall  go  away  into  ever 
lasting  punishment,"  etc. 

Let  me  explain. 


Hell  173 

If  we  examine  the  Bible  carefully  we  shall 
find  that,  while  there  are  a  great  many  clear 
proofs  of  the  certainty  and  awfulness  of  Hell, 
the  proofs  of  this  theory  of  Everlasting  Tor 
ment  are  not  much  to  be  depended  on.  Prac 
tically  they  can  all  be  gathered  into  three 
groups. 

In  the  first  the  chief    word   is  DAMN  or 

DAMNATION. 

In  the  second  the  chief  word  is  HELL. 

In  the  third  the  chief  word  is  EVERLASTING. 

It  is  not  too  much  to  say  that  if  these  three 
sets  of  passages  were  removed  from  the  Bible 
nobody  would  think  of  believing  in  everlasting 
torment.  Now  let  me  make  the  assertion 
straight  out — The.e  is  no  word  in  the  original 
language  of  the  Bible  that  at  all  justifies  the 
use  of  either  of  these  words  in  the  meaning 
that  we  have  attached  to  it — and  therefore 
the  Eevised  Yersion  of  the  Bible  has  practi 
cally  swept  them  all  away. 

§1 

Take  first  the  words  Damn,  Damnation 
which  convey  to  us  the  idea  of  doom  to  a  Hell 
of  never  ending  torment  and  never-ending  sin. 


174  The  Far  Hereafter 

The  original  word  conveyed  no  such  idea  to 
our  Lord  or  the  Apostles.  It  conveyed  no 
such  idea  to  the  translators  of  the  Authorized 
Yersion.  When  they  translated  it  Damn  and 
Damnation  they  did  not  at  all  mean  what  we 
now  mean. 

There  are  two  Greek  words,  »plvu>  which 
means  simply  to  judge,  and  Rara-Kplva>  which 
means  to  judge  adversely,  to  condemn,  and  it  is 
sometimes  the  first  and  sometimes  the  second 
of  these  words  which  is  translated  "Damn." 
"Why  is  it  so  translated  ?  Surely  the  transla 
tors  did  not  think  so  evil  of  God  as  to  believe 
that  He  could  never  judge  a  man  without  con 
demning  him  and  that  He  could  never  condemn 
him  except  to  everlasting  torment.  JSTot  at  all. 
They  had  no  thought  of  this.  The  English 
word  "  damn  "  at  that  time  had  no  such  awful 
meaning  as  has  grown  into  it  in  our  day 
through  the  wide-spread  influence  of  the  theory 
which  I  am  criticizing.  It  simply  meant  what 
the  Greek  word  meant.  I  find  an  interesting 
illustration  of  this  in  the  Wycliffe  Bible  in  the 
passage  about  the  woman  taken  in  adultery. 
Jesus  saith,  "Woman,  hath  no  man  damned 
thee?"  "No  man,  Lord."  "Neither  do  I 


Hell  175 

damn  thee."  That  is  to  say  the  English  word 
Damn  at  that  time  only  meant  "condemn" 
But  words  are  dangerous  things  if  not  care 
fully  watched,  owing  to  their  tendency  to 
change  their  meaning  as  a  language  grows. 
A  new,  darker  meaning  has  grown  on  to  the 
English  word  since.  Once  an  innocent  word, 
it  has  now  become  dangerous  and  mislead 
ing.  Therefore,  the  Eevisers  have  swept  it 
away,  and  the  words  damn  and  damnation  have 
now  vanished  entirely  and  for  ever  out  of  the 
pages  of  the  English  Bible.  Unfortunately  the 
public  do  not  read  the  Revised  Version. 

"With  this  explanation  I  ask  the  reader  to 
turn  back  to  his  Bible.  In  our  sense  of  the 
word  did  our  Lord  say,  "  He  that  believeth  not 
shall  be  damned"?  Most  certainly  not.  He 
said  that  he  should  be  condemned  for  wilfully 
disbelieving,  but  He  did  not  say  to  what  he 
should  be  condemned,  nor  for  how  long.  I 
should  condemn  you  for  doing  a  selfish  act,  but 
that  would  hardly  mean  sending  you  to  endless 
torment.  Did  He  say  that  those  who  had  done 
evil  should  rise  to  the  resurrection  of  damna 
tion?  (1  J  ohn  v.  29).  ]STo.  He  said,  "  to  the 


176  The  Far  Hereafter 

resurrection  of  judgment."  (See  R.  Y.)  Did 
St.  Paul  say,  "  He  that  doubteth  (about  eating 
certain  meats)  is  damned  if  he  eat "  ?  (Rom. 
xiv.  23).  Did  he  say  that  a  church  widow 
should  have  damnation  for  marrying  again? 
(1  Tim.  v.  12).  Of  course  not ;  the  word  only 
means  judgment  or  condemnation.  There  is  no 
thought  at  all  in  it  of  this  endless  Hell  as  the 
Revised  Version  has  plainly  shown.  So  we 
see  that  at  any  rate  all  these  texts  about 
"damnation"  can  no  longer  be  used  in  proof 
of  everlasting  torment  and  everlasting  sin. 


Something  similar  is  true  about  the  texts 
whose  chief  word  is  "  Hell."  The  word  "  hell " 
occurs  eighteen  times  in  the  Authorized  Ver- 
sion.  Once  it  is  a  translation  of  a  Greek  word 
Tartarus  (2  Peter  ii.  4)  cast  down  to  Hell  to 
be  reserved  "  unto  the  Day  of  Judgment" 
That  certainly  was  not  everlasting.  Five 
times  it  is  a  translation  of  the  word  Hades 
whose  meaning  we  already  know,  and  which 
certainly  did  not  mean  everlasting.  The  other 
twelve  times  it  is  a  translation  of  the  word 
Gehenna  used  by  our  Lord,  and  no  scholar 


Hell  177 

with  the  least  regard  for  his  reputation  would 
dream  of  stating  that  our  Lord  certainly  meant 
it  to  convey  the  idea  of  endlessness.  It  was 
the  name  of  a  horrible  valley  outside  Jerusalem 
where  things  were  cast  out  to  be  burnt,  to  keep 
the  city  pure.  The  Jewish  prophets  took  the 
word  as  a  metaphor  to  express  the  fate  of 
wicked  men.  From  it  they  drew  their  images 
used  by  our  Lord  of  "  the  worm  that  dieth  not 
and  the  fire  that  is  not  quenched  "  (Markx.  46). 
To  be  in  danger  of  Gehenna  was  to  be  in 
danger  of  a  hereafter  doom  suggested  by  this 
dread  place. 

Our  Lord  simply  took  up  the  vague  Jewish 
word  and  did  not  define  it.  What  exactly  had 
He  in  His  mind  when  He  used  this  word? 
This  is  a  question  of  terrible  importance.  He 
certainly  meant  something  very  stern  and 
awful.  He  seems  to  indicate  also  something 
final  and  irrevocable.  But  there  is  absolutely 
no  reason  to  believe  that  He  meant  to  convey 
the  idea  in  our  minds  of  a  vast  prison,  in 
which  the  souls  of  the  lost  are  pierced  through 
with  agony  for  ever  and  ever.  You  ask,  How 
can  I  know  what  He  meant  ?  How  could  I 
know  what  Shakespeare  meant  by  a  certain 


178  The  Far  Hereafter 

word?  I  should  read  up  all  the  books  and 
letters  of  Shakespeare's  times  in  which  the 
word  occurs,  and  whatever  it  commonly  meant 
to  the  people  of  Shakespeare's  time  I  should  ac 
cept  as  being  what  Shakespeare  meant.  That 
looks  sensible,  does  it  not?  Well,  a  very 
interesting  investigation  has  been  made  by 
various  scholars.  They  have  examined  all  the 
existing  Jewish  writings  where  the  word 
Gehenna  was  used  from  300  B.  c.  to  300  A.  D. 
Then  they  have  examined  the  Jewish  Tal- 
muds  which  run  on  to  the  fourth  and  fifth 
century.  A  modern  English  scholar,  Dr.  Dewes, 
says  (Plea  for  a  New  Translation,  p.  23) : 
"Every  passage  has  been  carefully  examined 
which  is  quoted  in  the  works  of  Lightfoot, 
Schoetgen,  Buxtorf,  Castell,  Schindler,  Glass, 
Bartoloccius,  Ugalino  and  Nork,  and  the  result 
of  the  whole  examination  is  this :  there  are 
only  two  passages  which  even  a  superficial 
reader  could  consider  to  be  corroborative  of  the 
assertion  that  the  Jews  understood  Gehenna  to 
be  a  place  of  everlasting  torment" 

I  give  a  few  specimens  from  the  Talmuds. 
"  Gehenna  is  ordained  of  old  because  of  sins." 
'*The  ungodly  will  be  judged  in  Gehenna 


Hell  179 

against  the  day  of  judgment"  "  The  ungodly 
shall  be  judged  in  Gehenna  until  the  righteous 
shall  say  of  them,  We  have  seen  enough"  "  The 
judgment  of  the  ungodly  is  for  twelve  months." 
"  Gehenna  is  nothing  but  a  day  in  which  the 
impious  will  be  burned."  "The  sinners  .  .  . 
shall  descend  into  Gehenna ;  at  the  end  of 
twelve  months  the  body  shall  be  consumed 
and  the  soul  burned  up  and  the  wind  shall 
scatter  it  under  the  feet  of  the  just." 

The  reader  sees,  of  course,  that  the  vague 
Jewish  opinions  have  no  authority  for  us  except 
to  help  us  to  get  at  the  meaning  of  our  Lord 
when  speaking  to  Jews  about  Gehenna.  "We 
may  assume  that  He  used  their  familiar  word 
in  the  sense  in  which  they  would  naturally  un 
derstand  it.  They  certainly  would  understand 
Him  to  proclaim  some  terrible  doom,  probably 
also  an  irrevocable  doom.  But  can  any  one 
affirm  that  they  must  have  understood  Him  to 
mean  endless  torment,  in  the  face  of  this 
evidence — and  its  powerful  confirmation  by  the 
greatest  of  all  modern  Jewish  students  of  the 
Talmud,  Emanuel  Deutsch.  "  There  is  no  ever 
lasting  damnation  in  the  Talmud "  (Remains, 
p.  53),  and  again,  "  There  is  not  a  word  in  the 


i8o  The  Far  Hereafter 

Talmud  which  supports  the  damnable  dogma 
of  endless  torment "  (Conversation  with  Mr. 
Cox,  Salvator  Mundi,  p.  72). 

The  American  Revised  Version  has  very 
wisely  removed  the  word  Hell  altogether  on 
account  of  the  misleading  associations  con 
nected  with  it.  It  substitutes  the  word 
Gehenna,  leaving  the  reader  to  ascertain  its 
meaning.  The  English  Eevisers  have  retained 
the  word  Hell  and  put  the  word  Gehenna  be 
side  it  in  the  margin.  I  think  this  was  a  pity, 
as  it  will  be  hard  for  the  ordinary  reader  to 
dissociate  the  word  Hell  from  the  theory 
which  has  unwarrantably  grown  on  to  it.  But 
at  any  rate  I  think  we  may  safely  say  that  no 
reader  who  understands  the  position  will  ever 
again  use  the  texts  in  which  our  Lord  speaks  of 
Hell  to  prove  the  absolute  certainty  of  the 
theory  of  Endless  Torment  and  Endless  Sin, 
So  vanishes  another  group  of  the  proof  texts 
for  this  theory. 

§3 

Now  take  the  group  of  texts  with  the  word 
"  everlasting."  It  is  surely  significant  that  the 
Revisers  have  completely  removed  this  word 


Hell  181 

also  in  every  case  and  substituted  for  it  the 
word  "  eternal,"  a  less  definite  word  and  which 
in  scholarly  usage  means  rather  the  opposite  of 
temporal — that  which  is  above  the  sphere  of 
time  and  space — that  which  belongs  to  the 
other  world.  At  any  rate  the  fact  that  they 
have  removed  it  in  every  case  shows  that  the 
word  "everlasting"  did  not  seem  to  them  a 
correct  translation. 

There  is  only  space  for  a  brief  explanation. 
The  original  word  is  the  adjective  a!a»io$  (aionios) 
(Eng.  aeonian),  coming  from  the  noun  aitav  (aion) 
(Eng.  aeon),  an  age,  an  epoch,  a  long  period  of 
time.  This  noun  cannot  mean  eternity  for  it  is 
repeatedly  used  by  St.  Paul  in  the  plural "  aeons" 
and  "aeons  of  aeons."  As  we  speak  of  great 
periods  of  time,  "the  Ice  Age,"  "the  Stone 
Age,"  etc.,  so  the  Bible  speaks  of  "  this  age  " 
(aeon),  "  the  coming  age  "  (aeon),  and  "  the  end 
of  the  age,"  etc.  These  aeons  or  ages  are 
thought  of  in  Scripture  as  vast  periods  past, 
present  and  future  in  which  the  Divine  purpose 
is  working  itself  out,  e.  g.,  God's  purpose  is  the 
purpose  of  the  ages  (aeons)  (Eph.  iii.  11). 
Christ's  name  is  above  every  name  not  only  in 
this  age  (aeon)  but  in  that  which  is  to  come 


182  The  Far  Hereafter 

(Eph.  i.  21).  "  That  in  the  ages  (aeons)  to  come 
He  might  shew,"  etc. 

From  this  noun,  then,  comes  the  adjective 
aldtvto?  (aionios) — asonian  which  may  be  defined 
"  age  long  "  or  "  belonging  to  the  ages,"  etc. 
Any  Greek  scholar  will  assert  unhesitatingly 
that  of  itself  it  does  not  mean  endless  or  ever 
lasting.  Sometimes,  as  when  applied  to  God, 
it  may  be  thus  translated  but  only  because  the 
meaning  is  inherent  in  the  noun  to  which  it  is 
applied.  The  word  a.'wxo?  of  itself  would  not 
positively  prove  the  endlessness  of  God.  This 
adjective  when  applied  to  any  thing  or  any 
state  of  being  cannot  of  itself  be  used  to  prove 
its  endlessness. 

It  is  worth  notice  too  that  in  the  Septuagint 
Greek  Bible,  the  version  usually  quoted  in  the 
Gospels  and  Epistles,  this  word  alwvtos  is  fre 
quently  applied  to  things  that  have  ended,  e.  g., 
the  gift  of  the  land  of  Canaan,  the  priesthood  of 
Aaron,  the  kingdom  of  David,  the  temple  at  Je 
rusalem,  the  daily  offerings,  etc.  When  the  noun 
always  means  a  finite  period  and  the  adjective  is 
applied  both  to  that  which  is  ended  and  to  that 
which  is  endless  it  would  surely  be  poor  scholar 
ship  if  the  Eevisers  allowed  the  word  "  ever- 


Hell  183 

lasting  "  to  remain  as  its  translation,  or  if  stu 
dents  of  theology  should  argue  from  it  the  end 
lessness  of  anything.  To  which  we  may  add 
that  there  are  Greek  adjectives  and  phrases 
which  do  definitely  mean  "  endless  "  and  which 
are  never  used  in  the  Bible  of  men's  fate  in  the 
Hereafter. 

Be  it  observed  that  all  this  does  not  prove 
that  the  punishment  of  the  future  ages  may  not 
be  everlasting.  It  only  proves  that  Scripture 
nowhere  asserts  unmistakably  that  it  must  "be 
so.  It  simply  asserts  that  it  is  asonian. 

The  thoughtful  advocates  of  Everlasting  Tor 
ment  are  of  course  aware  of  all  this.  But  they 
honestly  feel  that  in  spite  of  the  indefiniteness 
of  the  adjective,  our  Lord  has  fixed  His  mean 
ing  beyond  question  in  the  one  passage  that 
has  become  so  famous  as  the  great  proof  text  in 
this  controversy,  "These  shall  go  away  into 
&onian  punishment,  but  the  righteous  into 
ceonian  life  "  (Matt.  xxv.  46).  Yery  reasonably 
they  say,  "  If  the  word  asserts  everlastingness 
in  the  one  case  it  must  also  in  the  other."  The 
answer  is  that  the  word  of  itself  cannot  assert 
everlastingness  in  either  case.  If  this  word 
were  our  only  proof  of  everlasting  life  then 


184  The  Far  Hereafter 

everlasting  life  would  be  a  doubtful  matter. 
But  the  everlastingness  of  that  life  like  the  ever- 
lastingness  of  God  is  evident  all  over  the  Bible 
quite  apart  from  this.  The  words  here  simply 
tell  that  the  one  shall  go  into  the  seonian  life 
and  the  other  into  seonian  punishment,  i.  e., 
that  the  one  shall  go  into  the  life  of  the  future 
age  and  the  other  into  the  punishment  of  the 
future  age  without  exactly  specifying  the  dura 
tion  of  either. 

I  quite  feel  that  the  close  connection  of  the 
words  suggests  at  least  the  probability  that  one 
is  as  lasting  as  the  other.  Yet  even  that  con 
sideration  is  weakened  by  asking  if  people  are 
willing  to  apply  it  to  St.  Paul's  statement,  "  As 
in  Adam  all  die  even  so  in  Christ  shall  all  be 
made  alive  "  (the  context  suggests  eternal  life). 
I  would  point  out,  too,  that  a  somewhat  similar 
verse  is  in  the  Septuagint  Bible  of  our  Lord's 
day  in  Hab.  iii.  6,  where  the  (aeonian)  ever 
lasting  mountains  were  scattered  before  God, 
whose  ways  are  (seonian)  everlasting.  Yet  it 
does  not  prove  that  the  one  is  as  endless  as  the 
other.  And  in  Eom.  xvi.  25-26  the  mystery 
hid  in  the  (seonian)  times  "  before  the  world 
began "  is  now  manifested  according  to  the 


Hell  185 

command  of  the  (seonian)   eternal  God.     But 
the  age  "  before  the  world  began  "  is  ended. 

At  any  rate  I  must  leave  the  matter  here. 
I  have  no  space  for  fuller  statement.  If  any 
man  feels  that  a  world  of  increasing  sin  and 
awful  torment  growing  no  nearer  to  its  end 
after  millions  and  millions  of  ages  does  not  dis 
turb  his  conscience  or  the  thoughts  of  God 
which  he  has  learned  from  the  whole  trend  of 
Scripture  this  text  will  probably  weigh  strongly 
with  him  in  spite  of  all  that  I  have  said.  But 
to  him  who  is  tortured  by  such  a  thought  of  God 
and  yet  feels  that  Scripture  binds  him  to  it,  it 
must  surely  be  some  relief  to  feel  that  even  in 
this  great  bulwark  text  of  Everlasting  Torment 
our  Lord  only  asserts  that  these  shall  go  away 
into  the  aeonian  punishment  or  chastisement1 
whatever  that  may  mean. 


Keluctantly,  impelled  by  a  sense  of  duty,  I 
have  dealt  with  this  theory  more  fully  than 
with  the  others.  Should  any  godly  people  fear 
that  I  am  lightening  an  awful  deterrent  to 

1  K6Xaat$ — chastisement,  correction,  punishment  (see 
Greek  Lexicon). 


186  The  Far  Hereafter 

sin  let  me  say  what  long  experience  has 
taught  me  of  the  danger  of  this  common 
theory. 

It  is  making  sad  loving  hearts  whom  God  has 
not  made  sad  and  making  earnest  Christians, 
who  feel  forced  to  believe  it,  perplexed  about 
the  love  and  justice  of  God  and  the  prophecies 
of  the  final  victory  of  good. 

It  is  forcing  into  the  background  the  true 
and  awfully  solemn  teaching  about  Hell  which 
ought  to  be  prominent  in  all  our  pulpits. 
"When  men  cannot  see  any  possible  reconcilia 
tion  between  the  doctrine  of  God's  love  and  their 
doctrine  of  Hell  they  are  very  apt  to  find  an 
easy  way  out.  "  "We  cannot  reconcile  them," 
said  a  young  layman  to  me  one  day,  "  therefore 
we  drop  out  one  of  them — Hell."  Do  not  be 
shocked  at  it.  Many  besides  my  young  lay 
man  are  unconsciously  doing  it.  Nowadays 
more  than  ever  we,  clergy,  are  teaching  much 
about  the  love  of  God.  But  nowadays  more 
than  ever  we  are  holding  our  tongues  about 
Hell.  "We  know  the  horrible  idea  which  Hell 
commonly  conveys.  Therefore  we  keep  it  in  the 
background  trusting  that  our  hearers  will  leave 
it  there  during  the  sermon  on  God's  love.  But 


Hell  187 

they  do  not,  and  so  we  are  very  unconvincing 
about  both  doctrines. 

Again,  this  common  theory  of  Hell  is  so  un 
reasonable  that  it  has  lost  its  power  as  a 
deterrent.  No  teaching  from  which  Conscience 
revolts  can  long  hold  its  power  over  men.  The 
rough  common  sense,  the  rough  moral  sense  of 
careless  men  makes  them  reject  it  and  treat  it 
as  a  subject  of  jest.  When  men  can  stupidly 
laugh  together  over  jests  about  hell-fire,  when 
the  devil  is  presented  as  a  clown  in  the  panto 
mime  it  indicates  something  very  wrong  in  the 
teaching.  No  doctrine  has  any  real  hold  on  the 
crowd  when  they  can  lightly  jest  about  it. 
And  because  of  their  unbelief  in  this  false  notion 
of  Hell  they  are  ceasing  to  believe  in  any  Hell 
at  all — ceasing  to  believe  in  that  awful  real 
Hell  which  is  taught  in  the  Bible  and  of  which 
God  is  giving  some  men  foretastes  even  in  this 
life. 

And  this  false  notion  of  Hell  tends  to 
shake  men's  belief  in  the  reality  of  Heaven. 
For  if  the  redeemed  could  enjoy  their  bliss 
in  Heaven,  knowing  that  myriads  are  ex 
isting  for  ever  and  ever  in  endless  suffering 
and  still  worse  in  endless  sin,  one  feels  that 


i88  The  Far  Hereafter 

they  have  grown  so  selfish  and  opposite  to 
Christ  thai  they  have  no  business  in  any 
heaven. 

We  dare  not  leave  out  the  love  of  God  and 
we  dare  not  leave  out  the  doctrine  of  Hell. 
Both  are  certainly  true.  Therefore  they  must 
be  capable  of  reconciliation.  The  reconcilia 
tion  must  not  come  in  ignoring  Hell  or  believing 
in  a  kindly,  good-natured  God  who  does  not 
judge  severely  about  moral  character  and  who 
only  cares  that  His  child  should  stop  crying 
and  be  happy.  We  are  having  too  much  of  this 
sentimentalism  nowadays.  It  is  a  miserable 
misconception  of  that  awful  holiness  which  is 
1  'of  purer  eyes  than  to  behold  inquity."  It 
would  never  explain  the  need  of  Christ  dying 
on  the  cross  to  put  away  sin. 

Whatever  reconciliation  we  find  here  or  here 
after  it  must  have  at  bottom  God's  unutter 
able  hatred  of  sin  but  also  God's  unutter 
able  love  and  pain  over  every  sinful  soul  which 
He  has  made.  This  theory  of  Endless  Tor 
ment  and  Endless  Sin  certainly  does  not  ap 
pear  to  satisfy  this  test,  and  it  has  in  addition 
to  face  the  stern  revolt  of  Keason  and  Con 
science. 


Hell  189 

II 

Tlie  theory  of  Universalism,  i.  £.,  that  all 
men  shall  at  length  be  saved. 

This  opinion  is  based  on  the  more  hopeful 
side  of  Scripture  that  we  have  referred  to,  but 
it  ignores  or  explains  away  what  contradicts  it 
in  the  darker  and  sterner  side.  If  one  could 
forget  that,  it  would  be  the  most  inspiring  of 
all  the  guesses  that  have  been  made.  As  pre 
sented  by  its  best  exponents,  such  men  as  Allen 
and  Jukes  and  Cox,  it  is  wonderfully  attractive 
and  at  first  sight  seems  to  satisfy  many  of  the 
conditions  of  the  problem.  It  takes  account  of  a 
just  and  awful  retribution  for  every  sin,  and  takes 
account  also  of  the  mysterious  hope  in  the  Here 
after  which  runs  through  the  Bible.  It  believes 
that  the  power  of  God  has  infinite  resources  and 
that  the  love  of  God  has  unwearying  persistence 
and  that  no  soul  can  ultimately  resist  such  re 
sources  and  such  love.  Even  Hell  itself  it  deems 
God's  final  effort  when  all  other  means  have 
failed. 

The  reader  who  thinks  there  can  be  no  possi 
ble  excuse  for  such  a  theory  should  glance  at  a 
few  of  the  passages  quoted  in  its  favour : 

"  God  who  wills  that  all  men  should  be  saved  " 


igo  The  Far  Hereafter 

(1  Tim.  ii.  4),  and  "  who  wills  that  all  men 
should  come  to  repentance "  (2  Peter  iii.  9). 
And  this  will  or  determination  of  God  is  "  im 
mutable"  (Heb.  vi.  7).  Again,  "Now  is  the 
judgment  of  this  world,  now  shall  the  Prince 
of  this  world  be  cast  out,  AND  I,  if  I  be  lifted  up, 
will  draw  all  men  unto  Myself  "  (John  xii.  31, 32). 
"All  flesh  shall  see  the  salvation  of  God" 
(Luke  iii.  6).  "  His  grace  bringing  salvation  to 
all  men  "  (Titus  ii.  11).  "  "We  trust  in  the  living 
God  who  is  the  Saviour  of  all  men,  especially 
of  those  who  believe  "  (1  Tim.  iv.  10).  "  He  is 
the  propitiation  not  for  our  sins  only,  ~but  also 
for  the  sins  of  the  whole  world  "  (1  John  ii.  2). 
"  He  was  manifested  that  He  might  destroy  the 
works  of  the  devil "  (1  John  iii.  8)  [and  destroy 
the  devil  (bruise  the  serpent's  head)  Gen. 
iii.  15].  "He  shall  overcome  the  strongman 
armed  (the  devil)  and  take  away  his  armour 
and  divide  his  spoils  "  (Luke  xi.  21,  22).  "  He 
was  manifested  to  put  away  sin  by  the  sacrifice 
of  Himself  "  (Heb.  ix.  26).  "  God  hath  not  cast 
away  His  people  whom  He  foreknew  .  .  . 
and  so  all  Israel  shall  be  saved  "  (Eom.  xii.  25-33 ). 
"  The  times  of  the  Restoration  of  all  things 
which  God  hath  promised  by  the  mouth  of  all 


Hell  191 

His  holy  prophets  since  the  world  began " 
(Acts  iii.  21).  "  As  in  Adam  all  die,  even  so  in 
Christ  shall  all  be  made  alive.  But  every  man 
in  his  own  order :  Christ  the  first-fruits ;  after 
wards  they  that  are  Christ's  at  His  coming. 
Then  corneth  the  end  .  .  .  when  all  things 
have  been  subjected  unto  Him1  .  .  .  then 
shall  the  Son  also  be  subjected  unto  Him  that 
put  all  things  under  Him  that  God  may  be  all 
in  all"  (1  Cor.  xv.  22-29). 

One  can  see  how  the  constant  study  of  such 
passages  should  lead  men  to  an  enthusiastic 
hope  and  lead  them  to  study  less  carefully  the 
stream  of  darker  teaching  that  seemed  to  con 
flict  with  these.  "Whatever  may  be  said  against 
the  advocates  of  Universalism  we  at  least  owe 
to  them  a  clearer  emphasizing  of  the  mysterious 
hopefulness  of  Scripture  as  to  the  final  triumph 
of  good. 

But  with  deep  reluctance  one  is  bound  to  as 
sert  that  the  advocates  of  Universal  Salvation 
to  a  great  degree  ignore  or  explain  away  unsat 
isfactorily  much  of  the  sterner  side  of  the 

1  The  same  Greek  words  are  used  of  His  enemies'  subjec 
tion  to  Christ  as  of  Christ's  subjection  to  the  Father  sug 
gesting  that  it  would  be  of  the  same  kind. 


192  The  Far  Hereafter 

Bible.  For  amid  all  its  hopefulness  there  is  a 
steadily  persistent  note  in  Scripture,  stern,  aw 
ful,  sorrowful,  which  seems  impossible  to  rec 
oncile  with  Uniyersalisni.  There  are  clear  and 
repeated  assertions  that  some  men  at  any  rate 
will  not  be  saved.  It  is  St.  Paul,  the  author  of 
so  many  of  those  hopeful  Scriptures  quoted, 
who  tells  us  "  even  weeping  "  of  men  "  whose 
end  is  destruction  "  (Phil.  iii.  19),  and  of  those 
whose  fate  shall  be  "eternal  destruction 
from  the  presence  of  God"  (2  Thess.  i.  9). 
It  is  the  loving  Christ  Himself  who  said 
of  one  of  His  apostles,  "It  were  good  for 
that  man  if  he  had  not  been  born  "  (St.  Matt, 
xxvi.  24). 

We  are  warned  back  too  by  the  tendency  of 
character  to  grow  permanent.  And  when  we 
are  told  that  God  "  willeth  all  men  to  be  saved," 
and  that  God  can  do  everything,  we  are  forced 
to  ask,  Can  God  do  contradictory  things  ?  Can 
God  make  a  door  to  be  open  and  shut  at  the 
same  time  ?  Can  God  make  a  thing  to  be  and 
not  to  be  at  the  same  time  ?  Can  God  make  a 
man's  will  free  to  choose  good  or  evil  and  yet 
secure  that  he  shall  certainly  choose  good  at  the 
last  ?  One  longs  to  believe  that  Universalism 


Hell  193 

should  be  true,  but  to  believe  it  we  must  ignore 
much  of  the  evidence  of  Scripture. 

Ill 

The  theory  of  Conditional  Immortality, 
i.  e.,  that  all  souls  who  fail  of  Eternal  Life 
shall  be  punished  not  by  Endless  Torment,  but 
by  Annihilation  and  the  loss  of  God  and  Heaven 
for  ever  and  ever. 

This  is  another  conjecture  framed  to  escape 
the  difficulties  of  the  former  two.  It  would  be 
consistent  both  with  retribution  for  evil  and  also 
with  the  final  victory  of  good.  That  in  the 
mysterious  nature  of  things  when  the  malignity 
of  sin  becomes  incurable,  a  soul  rotted  through 
with  sin  might  ultimately  die  out  of  existence ; 
this  opinion  is  at  least  allowable  as  a  conjecture 
to  escape  from  the  theory  of  Endless  Torment 
and  Sin.  It  would  in  a  real  sense  be  an  ever 
lasting  punishment,  being  an  everlasting  loss  of 
Heaven  and  God.  But  it  too  is  founded  only 
on  part  of  the  evidence,  on  such  texts  as  "  The 
gift  of  God  is  eternal  life,"  "  He  that  hath  the 
Son  hath  life,"  implying  that  immortality  is  a 
conditional  thing  granted  only  to  those  who 
are  saved,  and  such  texts  as  "  eternal  destruo- 


194  The  Far  Hereafter 

tion  from  the  presence  of  God,"  and  the  idea 
of  utter  annihilation  in  such  passages  as  "  burn 
up  the  chaif  with  unquenchable  fire."  It  has 
no  solid  support  in  Scripture.  There  is  much 
in  Scripture  which  makes  it  difficult  to  accept 
it.  And  it  contradicts  straight  out  the  wide 
spread  Christian  belief  in  the  essential  immor 
tality  of  the  soul  (though  that  belief  also  needs 
to  be  examined).  At  any  rate  it  cannot  claim 
authority  as  a  theory  of  future  punishment. 

IV 

These  are  the  only  conjectures  offered  us  to 
solve  the  difficulties  connected  with  Final  Ret 
ribution.  We  find  them  all  unsatisfactory. 
We  have  reached  no  definite  doctrine  of  Hell. 
With  the  evidence  at  our  disposal  it  seems  im 
possible  to  do  so.  The  failure  of  all  attempts 
at  reconciling  the  seeming  contradictions  of 
Scripture  must  suggest  to  us  that  the  solution 
of  this  problem  is  beyond  the  range  of  our 
present  powers.  At  any  rate  it  is  beyond  the 
range  of  our  present  knowledge.  Surely  it  is 
wise  and  reverent  to  think  that  this  points  to 
gome  dealing  of  God  beyond  our  human  ken 
which  will  one  day  reconcile  all  the  difficul- 


Hell  195 

ties.1  Our  little  guesses  do  not  exhaust  God's 
possibilities.  Some  day  we  shall  find  the  an 
swer  in  that  land  where  we  shall  know  even  as 
we  are  known.  And  when  we  find  it  we  know 
it  will  be  consistent  with  our  highest  thoughts 
of  God.  I  like  to  think  that  it  is  those  who 
have  grown  closest  to  Christ  in  sympathy  for 
sorrow  and  pain  and  who  unlike  us,  know  all 
the  facts  of  the  case,  who  are  represented  aa 
joining  in  that  glad  shout  hereafter,  "  Halle 
lujah  !  salvation  and  glory  and  power  belong  to 

Our  God,  FOR  TRUE  AND  RIGHTEOUS  ARE  Hl3 

JUDGMENTS."  Leave  the  manifestation  of  this 
to  God.  A  wise  old  man  once  said,  "  God  has  a 
good  deal  of  time  to  do  things  between  this 
and  the  other  side  of  eternity." 

This  then  is  the  conclusion  of  the  whole  mat 
ter.  A  return  to  the  reserve  and  reticence  of 
Scripture.  But  with  this  result  of  our  study, 
that  we  feel  no  longer  forced  to  believe  of  God 
that  which  Conscience  declares  to  be  unworthy 
of  Him.  We  are  set  free  to  believe  that  the 
Judge  of  all  the  earth  will  do  right — that 

1In  other  antinomiee  of  Scripture,  e.  g.,  Man's  free  will 
and  God's  foreknowledge,  we  have  to  take  refuge  in  a  similai 
Belief. 


96  The  Far.  Hereafter 

Hell  as  well  as  Heaven  is  within  the  confines 
of  His  dominion — that  evil  shall  not  last  for 
ever;  that  in  spite  of  all  its  conflicting  evi 
dence  the  trend  of  Scripture  moves  towards  the 
golden  age,  the  final  victory  of  good. 

Thus  we  leave  it. 

In  our  final  vision  of  humanity  in  Christ's 
great  drama  of  the  Judgment,  those  on  the  left 
are  passing  into  the  outer  darkness  and  as  they 
pass  the  curtain  falls  behind  them  and  we 
see  them  no  more.  We  know  not  what  is  pass 
ing  in  that  outer  darkness  where  there  is 
"weeping  and  gnashing  of  teeth."  "We  have 
no  grounds  to  believe  that  any  soul  there  is 
being  born  again  through  sorrow  and  shame, 
that  any  spoiled  and  deformed  life  is  being  re 
moulded  in  that  awful  crucible  of  God. 

But  as  we  watch  the  awful  shadows  of  that 
outer  darkness,  there  comes  beyond  it  on  the 
far  horizon  the  quivering  of  a  coming  dawn. 
For  that  age  of  God's  Gehenna  is  to  have  its 
end,  and  far  away  the  day  will  dawn  for  which 
the  whole  creation  groaneth  and  travaileth.  to 
gether  ;  when  evil  shall  have  vanished  out  of 
the  universe  for  ever ;  when  death  and  Hell, 
the  evil  and  the  Evil  One  shall  be  cast  into  the 


Hell  197 

lake  of  fire ;  when  "  at  the  name  of  Jesus 
every  knee  shall  bow  of  things  in  Heaven  and 
earth,  and  under  the  earth  "  (in  the  world  of  the 
dead).  "  And  every  tongue  shall  confess  that 
Jesus  Christ  is  Lord  to  the  glory  of  God  the 
Father."  "  Then  cometh  the  end,"  says  St.  Paul, 
"  when  Christ  shall  deliver  up  the  Kingdom  to 
God,  even  the  Father,  when  all  His  enemies 
shall  be  subjected  unto  Him.  And  when  all 
His  enemies  have  been  subjected  unto  Him, 
then  shall  the  Son  also  Himself  be  subjected 
unto  Him  that  put  all  things  under  Him,  that 
God  may  be  all  in  all." 

That  is  what  shall  be.  One  day,  somewhere 
in  the  far  mysterious  future  the  "  purpose  of  the 
ages  "  shall  be  accomplished.  Evil  shall  have 
vanished  out  of  the  universe  for  ever  and 
God  shall  be  all  in  all.  One  day  again  it 
shall  be  as  at  the  creation  when  "  God  looked 
on  everything  that  He  had  made  and  behold  it 
was  very  good."  How  ?  We  know  not  and 
we  need  not  know.  We  need  not  be  able  to 
assert  dogmatically  how  He  will  accomplish 
His  purpose.  We  need  not  be  able  to  assert 
that  all  men  shall  be  saved  or  that  all  who  are 
not  will  be  annihilated.  But  we  must  be  able 


198  he  Far  Hereafter 

with  trustful  hearts  to  assert  God's  love  and 
God's  power  and  the  final  abolishing  of  evil, 
even  though  we  can  only  do  it  with  the  poet's 
vagueness : 

At  last  I  heard  a  voice  upon  the  slope 
Cry  to  the  summit,  " Is  there  any  hope!" 
To  which  an  answer  pealed  from  that  high  land, 
But  in  a  tongue  no  man  could  understand, 
And  on  the  glimmering  summit  far  withdrawn 
God  made  Himself  an  awful  rose  of  dawn. 


m 

HEAVEN 

AT  last  "  I "  has  reached  the  goal.  In 
that  far  future  comes  the  glad  finale 
of  human  history,  the  realization  of 
the  eternal  thought  in  the  mind  of  God  from 
the  beginning.  As  the  unwritten  play  of  a 
great  dramatist  lies  in  his  mind  before  it  is 
uttered  or  acted,  with  every  problem  solved 
and  every  contingency  provided  for — so  we  be 
lieve  the  whole  extended  drama  lay  in  the 
Eternal  Mind— the  path  of  struggle  and  pain 
— the  cross-currents  of  human  will — the  glorious 
conclusion  of  it  all.  Nothing  was  an  after 
thought.  Now  at  last  Christ  "  shall  see  of  the 
travail  of  His  soul  and  shall  be  satisfied."  Aye 
— satisfied.  It  was  worth  the  cost.  Worth 
the  Incarnation  of  the  Eternal  Son — worth  the 
sorrow  and  the  pain — worth  being  misunder 
stood  and  shamed  and  mocked  and  scourged 
and  spitted  on  and  crucified — this  final  satis 
faction  of  His  tender  love.  "  Eye  hath  not  seen 
nor  ear  heard  nor  hath  it  entered  into  the 
heart  of  man  to  conceive  the  things  that  God 
199 


200  The  Far  Hereafter 

hath  prepared.  They  shall  hunger  no  more 
nor  thirst  any  more,  neither  shall  the  sun  light 
on  them  nor  any  burning  heat,  for  the  Lamb 
which  is  in  the  midst  of  the  Throne  shall 
shepherd  them  and  lead  them  to  eternal  foun 
tains  of  waters,  and  God  shall  wipe  away  every 
tear  from  their  eyes.  There  shall  be  no  more 
death — no  mourning  nor  crying  nor  pain  any 
more,  for  the  former  things — the  old  bad  things 
— have  passed  away."  That  is  the  end  of  God's 
purpose  for  men.  Surely  it  will  be  the  won 
dering  cry  of  the  angels  for  ever,  "  Behold  how 
He  loved  them ! " 

I.    WHAT  is  MEANT  BY  HEAVEN? 

To  us  with  our  limited  faculties  Heaven  is 
practically  inconceivable.  "We  have  no  ex 
perience  that  would  help  us  to  realize  it.  Even 
the  inspired  writers  can  but  touch  the  thought 
vaguely  in  allegory  and  gorgeous  vision,  piling 
up  images  of  earthly  things  precious  and 
beautiful — thrones  and  crowns  and  gates  of 
pearl  and  golden  streets  in  the  heavenly  city 
"  coming  down  from  God  prepared  as  a  bride 
adorned  for  her  husband." 

The    only    clear    thought    we    have    about 


Heaven  201 

external  things  in  Heaven  is  that  "I"  who 
lived  here  in  an  earthly  body  and  in  the  Near 
Hereafter  lived  a  spirit  life  "  absent  from  the 
body  "  —  shall  in  that  Far  Hereafter  have  a 
spiritual  body  analogous  we  suppose  to  the 
body  "  I "  had  on  earth.  Not  the  poor  body, 
certainly,  which  rotted  in  the  grave,  "  ashes  to 
ashes,  dust  to  dust  "  but  a  "  glorified  body,"  and 
yet  it  would  seem  having  some  strange  mys 
terious  connection  with  the  earthly  body.  As 
the  oak  is  the  resurrection  body  of  the  acorn, 
and  the  lily  of  the  ugly  little  bulb  that  decayed 
in  the  ground,  "  so  also  is  the  resurrection  of 
the  dead.  It  is  sown  in  corruption,  it  is  raised 
in  incorruption ;  it  is  sown  in  weakness,  it  is 
raised  in  power ;  it  is  sown  a  natural  body,  it  is 
raised  a  spiritual  body."  That  gives  very  little 
information  but  it  gives  some  tangible  idea  to 
grasp.  Beyond  this  there  is  no  hold  for 
imagination. 

But  as  we  saw  in  the  earlier  chapters  on  the 
Intermediate  Life  I  am  still  "I,"  the  same 
conscious  self  through  the  whole  life  of  Earth 
and  Hades  and  Heaven,  and  therefore  the  real 
life,  the  inner  life  can  still  be  understood.  So 
when  we  enquire  what  can  be  known  about  the 


202  The  Far  Hereafter 

meaning  of  Heaven — at  the  very  start  I 
strike  the  key-note  of  the  thoughts  that  follow, 
in  the  words  of  Christ  Himself,  "  The  Kingdom 
of  God  is  within  you."  Heaven  is  a  something 
within  you  rather  than  without  you.  Heaven 
means  character  rather  than  possessions.  The 
Kingdom  of  God  is  not  meat  and  drink,  but 
Righteousness  and  Peace  and  Joy  in  the  Holy 
Ghost. 

That  is  the  thought  which  I  am  trying  to 
keep  prominent  all  through  this  book.  Hades 
life  is  dependent  on  character.  Judgment  is  a 
sorting  according  to  character.  Heaven  and 
Hell  are  tempers  or  conditions  of  character 
within  us.  They  are  not  merely  places  to 
which  God  sends  us  arbitrarily.  They  are 
conditions  which  we  make  for  ourselves.  If 
God  could  send  all  men  to  Heaven,  all  men 
would  be  there.  If  God  could  keep  all  men 
from  Hell,  no  one  would  be  there.  It  is  char 
acter  that  makes  Heaven.  It  is  character  that 
makes  Hell.  They  are  states  of  mind  that 
begin  here,  and  are  continued  and  developed 
there. 

I  have  known  men  who  were  in  Hell  here— 
they  told  me  so — men  of  brutal  character,  men 


Heaven  203 

in  delirium  tremens,  who  saw  devils  grinning  at 
them  from  the  bed.  That  if  continued  and  de 
veloped  would  mean  Hell  there.  I  have  known 
sweet,  unselfish  lives  who  are  in  Heaven  here. 
That  continued  and  developed  would  mean 
Heaven  there.  You  know  how  one  could  be  in 
Heaven  here.  Do  you  remember  these  wonder 
ful  words  of  our  Lord,  "  No  man  hath  ascended 
into  Heaven,  only  the  Son  of  Man  who  is  in 
Heaven  "  ?  Not  was,  not  shall  le,  but  is  always 
in  Heaven,  because  always  in  unselfish  love — 
always  in  accord  and  in  communion  with  God. 
So,  you  see,  a  man  carries  the  beginning  of 
Heaven  and  Hell  within  him,  according  to  the 
state  of  his  own  heart.  A  selfish,  godless  man 
cannot  have  any  Heaven  so  long  as  he  remains 
selfish  and  godless.  For  Heaven  consists  in 
forgetting  self,  and  loving  God  and  man  with 
heart  and  soul. 


Do  you  see,  then,  the  mistake  that  people 
have  been  making  in  discussing  what  is  meant 
by  Heaven?  In  all  ages — in  all  races — men 
have  speculated  about  it,  and  their  speculations 
have  been  largely  coloured  by  their  characters 


204  The  Far  Hereafter 

and  temperaments.  The  Indian  placed  it  in 
the  Happy  Hunting  Ground.  The  Greeks 
placed  it  in  the  Islands  of  the  Blest,  where 
warriors  rested  after  the  battle.  The  North 
man  and  the  Mussulman  had  his  equally  sensual 
Heaven.  And  many  Christians  have  as  foolish 
notions  as  any  one  else.  Some  think  that  they 
win  Heaven  by  believing  something  with  their 
minds  about  our  Lord's  atonement.  Some 
think  they  go  to  Heaven  by  soaring  up  through 
the  air.  Some  of  them,  taking  in  its  literal 
meaning  the  glorious  imagery  of  the  Apoc 
alypse,  picture  to  themselves  streets  of  beaten 
gold  and  walls  of  flashing  emerald  and  jasper, 
and  the  wearing  of  crowns  and  the  singing  of 
Psalms  over  and  over  again  through  all  the 
ages  of  eternity. 

What  is  the  fault  in  aU  such  ?  That  they  do 
not  understand  what  Heaven  really  means. 
They  think  of  it  as  a  something  outside  them 
which  anybody  could  enjoy  if  he  could  only 
get  there.  They  do  not  understand  that  Heaven 
means  the  joy  of  being  in  union  with  God — that 
the  outward  Heaven  has  no  meaning  till  the  in 
ward  Heaven  has  begun  in  ourselves.  I  need 
not  point  out  to  you  that  our  immortal  spirits 


Heaven  205 

would  find  little  happiness  in  golden  pave 
ments  and  gates  of  pearl.  People  on  this 
earth,  who  have  their  fill  of  gold  and  pearl,  do 
not  always  gain  much  happiness  from  them. 
They  are  mere  external  things — they  cannot 
give  eternal  joy,  because  that  comes  from 
within,  not  from  without.  It  depends  not  on 
what  we  have,  but  on  what  we  are,  not  on  the 
riches  of  our  possessions,  but  on  the  beauty  of 
our  lives. 

The  gorgeous  vision  of  the  Apocalypse  has 
its  meaning,  but  it  is  not  the  carnal,  literal 
meaning  of  foolish  men.  It  tells  of  the  bright 
river  of  the  water  of  life ;  of  glorified  cities, 
where  nothing  foul,  or  mean,  or  ignoble  shall 
dwell ;  of  the  white  robes  of  our  stainless 
purity ;  of  the  crowns  and  palms,  the  emblems 
of  victory  over  temptation ;  of  the  throne 
which  indicates  calm  mastery  over  sin ;  of  the 
song  and  music  and  gladsome  feasting  to  image 
faintly  the  abounding  happiness  and  the  fervent 
thanksgiving  for  the  goodness  of  God.  They 
are  all  mere  symbols — mere  earthly  pictures 
with  a  heavenly  meaning,  and  the  meaning 
which  lies  behind  them  all  is  this  :  The  joy  of 
Heaven  means  the  inward  joy  ;  the  joy  of  char- 


206  The  Far  Hereafter 

acter  •  ike  joy  of  goodness  ;  the  joy  of  likeness 
to  the  Nature  of  God.  That  is  the  highest 
joy  of  all — the  only  joy  worthy  of  making 
Heaven  for  men  who  are  made  in  the  image 
of  God. 

§3 

It  is  not  difficult  to  show  this  to  any  true 
man  or  woman  who  is  humbly  trying  to  do 
beautiful  deeds  on  earth.  Of  course,  if  a  man 
be  very  selfish  and  worldly ;  a  man  who  never 
tries  to  help  another;  a  man  who  smiles  at 
these  things  as  unreal  sentiment ;  who  tells 
you  that  hard  cash  and  success  in  life,  and  "  to 
mind  number  one,"  as  they  say,  are  the  chief 
things ;  a  man  who  never  feels  his  pulses  beat 
faster  at  the  story  of  noble  deeds — you  cannot 
absolutely  prove  to  him  that  the  joy  of  char 
acter  is  the  highest  happiness.  You  cannot 
prove  to  a  blind  man  the  beauty  of  the  sunset 
sky  ;  you  cannot  arouse  a  deaf  man  to  enthu 
siasm  about  sweet  music ;  and  you  cannot 
prove  to  an  utterly  selfish,  earthly  man  that 
self-sacrifice  and  purity  and  heroism  and  love 
are  the  loveliest  and  the  most  desirable  pos 
sessions — the  sources  of  the  highest  and  most 


Heaven  207 

lasting  joy.  But  I  feel  sure  that  most  of  us, 
with  all  our  faults,  have  in  our  better  mo 
ments  the  desire  and  the  admiration — aye,  and 
the  effort,  too,  after  nobleness  of  life,  and  there 
fore  we  can  understand  this  highest  joy  of 
Heaven.  We  have  had  experience  sometimes, 
however  rarely,  of  lovely  deeds,  and  the  sweet, 
pure  joy  that  follows  in  their  train.  Well, 
whenever  you  have  conquered  some  craving 
temptation  or  borne  trouble  for  another's  sake  ; 
when  you  have  helped  and  brightened  some 
poor  life,  and  kept  quiet  in  the  shade  that  no 
one  should  know  of  it ;  when  you  have  tried 
to  do  the  right  at  heavy  cost  to  yourself ;  when 
the  old  father  or  mother  at  home  has  thanked 
God  for  the  comfort  you  have  been  in  their 
declining  years ;  whenever  in  the  midst  of  all 
your  sins  you  have  done  anything  for  the  love 
of  God  or  man,  do  you  not  know  what  a  sweet, 
pure  happiness  has  welled  up  in  your  heart, 
entirely  different  in  kind,  infinitely  higher  in 
degree  than  any  pleasure  that  ever  came  to 
you  from  riches  or  amusement  or  the  applause 
of  men.  Of  this  kind  surely  must  be  the  pure 
joy  of  Heaven.  Call  up  the  recollection  of 
some  of  those  cherished  moments  of  your  life, 


2o8  The  Far  Hereafter 

and  multiply  by  infinity  the  pleasure  that  you 
felt,  and  you  will  have  some  faint  notion  of 
what  is  meant  by  Heaven,  the  Heaven  that 
God  designs  for  man. 

II.  WHAT  is  HEAVEN'S  SUPEEME  JOY? 
Thus,  then,  we  answer  the  first  of  our  ques 
tions — What  is  meant  by  Heaven  ?  Heaven 
means  a  state  of  character  rather  than  a  place 
of  residence.  Heaven  means  to  be  something 
rather  than  to  go  somewhere.  But  though 
Heaven  means  a  state  of  character  rather  than 
a  place  of  residence,  yet  it  means  a  place  of 
residence,  too.  And  though  Heaven  means  to 
be  something  rather  than  to  go  somewhere,  yet 
it  means  to  go  somewhere,  too.  And  from  this 
the  second  question  easily  follows.  What  can 
be  known  about  that  life  in  Heaven  ? 

"  Oh,  for  a  nearer  insight  into  Heaven, 

More  knowledge  of  the  glory  and  the  joy, 
Which  there  unto  the  happy  souls  is  given, 
Their  intercourse,  their  worship,  their  em 
ploy." 

We  do  not  know  a  great  deal  about  it. 

The  Bible  is  given  to  help  us  to  live  rightly 


Heaven  209 

in  this  world,  not  to  satisfy  curiosity  about 
the  other  world.  But  yet  some  glimpses 
of  the  blessed  life  have  come  to  us,  for  our 
teaching. 

The  first  thing  to  learn  is  that  the  chief  joy 
of  Heaven  shall  consist  in  that  of  which  we  can 
only  dream  in  this  life,  of  which  we  can  have 
but  a  partial  glimpse  even  in  the  Hades  or 
Paradise  Life — the  Beatific  Vision,  the  clear 
vision  and  knowledge  of  God.  All  this  life  and 
all  the  Paradise  life  are  fitting  and  training  and 
preparing  us  for  this  consummation. 

Wise  theologians  of  old  divided  the  happi 
ness  of  Heaven  into  "  Essential "  and  "  Acci 
dental"  By  essential  they  meant  the  happi 
ness  which  the  soul  derives  immediately  from 
God's  presence,  from  the  Beatific  Vision.  By 
accidental  they  meant  the  additional  happiness 
which  comes  from  creatures,  from  meeting  with 
friends,  from  the  joyous  occupations  and  all  the 
delights  of  ever- widening  knowledge. 

But  the  Presence  of  God,  the  Vision  of  God, 
is  the  essential  thing  which  gives  light  and  joy 
to  all  the  others.  Without  that  Vision  of  God 
all  would  be  dark  as  this  beautiful  world  would 
be  without  the  sun.  Without  that  joy  of  God's 


21O  The  Far  Hereafter 

presence  all  other  joys  would  be  spoiled,  just  as 
the  gifts  of  this  life  would  be  without  the 
central  gift  of  health. 

That  is  the  central  thought  about  Heaven  in 
the  Bible,  the  central  thought  of  God's  noblest 
saints  of  old,  aye,  and  the  central  thought  of 
some  of  the  noblest  amongst  ourselves  to-day. 

Does  it  seem  unreal,  unnatural,  to  some  of  us  ? 
I  can  well  believe  it.  Few  of  us  love  God  well 
enough  yet  to  desire  Him  above  all  things. 
Most  of  us,  I  fear,  if  we  would  honestly  confess 
it,  think  more  of  the  joy  of  meeting  our  dear 
ones  than  of  the  joy  of  being  with  God.  But 
God  is  very  gentle  with  us.  "  He  knoweth  our 
frame ;  He  remembereth  that  we  are  but  dust." 
He  will  gradually  train  us  here  and  hereafter, 
and  one  day  we,  too,  shall  love  Him  above  all 
things.  Oh !  I  do  think  that  to  know  the 
tender  patience  of  Christ's  love  as  we  shall  know 
it  then,  to  know  God  as  He  is,  with  all  the  false 
notions  about  Him  swept  away,  will  make  it 
impossible  to  withhold  our  love  from  Him. 
And  if  even  our  poor  love  for  each  other  on 
earth  is  such  a  happiness  think  what  joy  may 
come  from  dwelling  in  that  unutterable  Love  of 
God. 


Heaven  211 

III.    THE  LIFE  IN  HEAVEN 
What  can  we  know  further  about  the  life  in 
Heaven,  about  what  the  old  theologians  called 
the  secondary  or  accidental  joys  as  compared 
with  the  supreme  joy  of  the  Beatific  Vision  ? 

We  know,  first,  There  shall  be  no  sin  there. 
It  shall  be  a  pure  and  innocent  life.  All  who 
on  earth  have  been  loving,  and  pure,  and  noble, 
and  brave,  and  self-sacrificing,  shall  be  there. 
All  who  have  been  cleansed  by  the  blood  of 
Christ  from  the  defilements  of  sin,  and  strength 
ened  by  the  power  of  Christ  against  the  entice 
ments  of  sin,  shall  be  there.  There  shall  be  no 
drunkenness  nor  impurity  there,  nor  hatred,  nor 
emulation,  nor  ill  temper,  nor  selfishness,  nor 
meanness.  Ah!  it  is  worth  hoping  for.  We 
poor  strugglers  who  hate  ourselves  and  are  so 
dissatisfied  with  ourselves,  who  look  from  afar 
at  the  lovely  ideals  rising  within  us,  who  think 
sorrowfully  of  all  which  we  might  have  been  and 
have  not  been — let  us  keep  up  heart.  One  day 
the  ideal  shall  become  the  real.  One  day  we 
shall  have  all  these  things  for  which  God 
has  put  the  craving  in  our  hearts  to-day.  We 
shall  have  no  sin  there.  We  shall  desire  only 
and  do  only  what  is  good.  We  shall  be  there 


212  The  Far  Hereafter 

what  we  have  only  seemed  or  wished  to  be 
here — honest,  true,  noble,  sincere,  genuine  to 
the  very  centre  of  our  being. 
No  sin  there. 


And  that  will  make  it  easier  to  under 
stand  the  second  fact  revealed  to  us.  No  sor 
row  there.  "They  shall  hunger  no  more, 
neither  thirst  any  more.  There  shall  be  no 
more  curse  ...  no  pain,  nor  sorrow,  nor 
crying,  and  God  shall  wipe  away  all  tears  from 
their  eyes."  That  is  not  hard  to  believe.  Sin 
i$  the  chief  cause  of  our  sorrow  on  earth.  If 
there  be  no  sin  there ;  if  all  are  pure  and  un 
selfish  and  generous  and  true,  and  if  God  wipes 
away  all  tears  that  come  from  causes  other  than 
sin,  it  is  easily  understood. 

But  let  us  not  degrade  this  thought  or  make 
it  selfish  or  unreal.  One  often  hears  the  sneer 
or  the  doubt  about  the  happiness  of  Heaven 
while  any  exist  who  have  lost  their  Heaven. 
We  do  not  know  the  answer  now.  But  we  shall 
know  it  then.  And  we  must  be  absolutely  cer 
tain  that  the  answer  lies  not  in  the  direction  of 
selfish  indifference.  The  higher  any  soul  on 


Heaven  2 1 3 

earth  grows  'in  love  the  less  can  it  escape  un 
selfish  sorrow  for  others.  Must  it  not  be  so  in 
that  land  too  ?  Surely  the  Highest  Himself 
must  have  more  pain  than  any  one  else  for  the 
self-caused  misery  of  men.  If  there  be  joy  in 
His  presence  over  one  that  repenteth  must  there 
not  be  pain  over  one  that  repenteth  not  ?  We 
can  only  say  in  our  deep  ignorance  that  until 
the  day  when  all  evil  shall  have  vanished  there 
are  surely  higher  things  in  God's  plan  for  His 
redeemed  than  selfish  happiness  and  content. 
There  is  the  blessedness  that  comes  of  sympathy 
with  Him  in  the  pain  which  is  the  underside  of 
the  Eternal  Love. 

§3 

!No  sin  in  Heaven.  No  sorrow  in  Heaven. 
What  else  do  we  certainly  know?  That  the 
essence  of  the  Heaven  life  will  be  love.  The  giv 
ing  of  oneself  for  the  service  of  others.  The 
going  out  of  oneself  in  sympathy  with  others. 
There  at  last  will  be  realized  St.  Paul's  glorious 
ideal.  There  it  can  be  said  of  every  man,  He 
suff ereth  long  and  is  kind ;  envieth  not ;  vaunteth 
not  himself ;  is  not  puffed  up ;  seeketh  not  his 
own ;  behaveth  not  uncourteously.  He  is  like 


214  The  Far  Hereafter 

the  eternal  God  Himself,  who  beareth  all 
things,  hopeth  all  things,  endureth  all  things 
(1  Cor.  xiii.  4-T). 


We  may  well  believe  that  there  will  be  no  dead 
level  of  attainment,  no  dead  level  of  perfection 
and  joy.  That  would  seem  to  us  very  uninter 
esting.  If  we  may  judge  from  God's  dealings 
here  and  from  the  many  texts  of  Scripture,  there 
will  be  an  infinite  variety  of  attainment,  of 
positions,  of  character.  "  In  the  Father's  house 
there  are  many  mansions."  Our  Lord  assumes 
that  we  would  expect  that  from  our  experience 
here.  "  If  it  were  not  so,  I  would  have  told 
you."  I  suppose  there  will  be  little  ones  there 
needing  to  be  taught  and  weak  ones  needing  to 
be  helped  ;  strong  leaders  sitting  at  His  right 
hand  in  His  Kingdom,  and  poor  backward  ones 
who  never  expected  to  get  into  it  at  all. 

And  so  surely  we  may  believe,  too,  will  there 
be  varieties  of  character  and  temperament.  We 
shall  not  lose  our  identity  and  our  peculiar 
characteristics  by  going  to  Heaven,  by  being 
lifted  to  a  higher  spiritual  condition.  Just  as 
a  careless  man  does  not  lose  his  identity  by 


Heaven  215 

conversion,  by  rising  to  a  higher  spiritual  state 
on  earth,  so  we  may  well  believe  when  we  die 
and  pass  into  the  life  of  the  waiting  souls,  and 
again  when  at  Christ's  coming  we  pass  into  the 
higher  Heaven  we  shall  remain  the  same  men 
and  women  as  we  were  before  and  yet  become 
very  different  men  and  women.  Our  lives  will 
not  be  broken  in  two,  but  transfigured.  We 
shall  not  lose  our  identity;  we  shall  still  be 
ourselves ;  we  shall  preserve  the  traits  of  char 
acter  that  individualize  us;  but  all  these  per 
sonal  traits  and  characteristics  will  be  suffused 
and  glorified  by  the  lifting  up  of  our  motive 
and  aim.  As  far  as  we  can  judge,  there  will 
be  a  delightful,  infinite  variety  in  the  Heaven- 
life. 

§5 

"What  else  ?  There  shall  be  work  in  Heaven. 
The  gift  of  God  is  eternal  life  and  that  life 
surely  means  activity.  We  are  told  "  His  serv 
ants  shall  serve  Him."  We  are  told  of  the  man 
who  increased  the  talents  or  the  pounds  to  five 
or  ten  that  he  was  to  be  used  for  glorious  work 
according  as  he  had  fitted  himself — "  Lord,  thy 
talent  hath  gained  five  talents,  ten  talents." 


216  The  Far  Hereafter 

What  was  the  reply  ?  "  You  are  now  to  go 
and  rest  for  all  eternity."  Not  a  bit  of  it.  "Be 
thou  ruler  over  five  cities,  over  ten  cities ;  enter 
thou  into  the  joy  of  thy  Lord."  I  know  some 
men  who  are  now  retired  after  a  very  busy 
active  life  of  work,  and  they  hate  the  idleness, 
they  are  sick  of  it.  No  wonder  the  conven 
tional  Heaven  does  not  appeal  to  them.  Ah, 
that  is  not  God's  Heaven.  "They  rest  from 
their  labours."  Yes ;  but  that  word  "  labours  " 
means  painful  strain.  In  eternal,  untiring 
youth  and  strength  we  shall  be  occupied  in 
doing  His  blessed  will  in  helping  and  blessing 
the  wide  universe  that  He  has  made.  Who  can 
tell  what  glorious  ministrations,  what  infinite 
activities,  what  endless  growth  and  progress, 
and  lifting  up  of  brethren,  God  has  in  store  for 
us  through  all  eternity.  Thank  God  for  the 
thought  of  that  joyous  work  of  never-tiring 
youth  and  vigour;  work  of  men  proudly  re 
joicing  in  their  strength,  helping  the  weak  ones, 
teaching  the  ignorant  aye  !  perhaps  for  the  very 
best  of  us  going  out  with  Christ  into  the  outer 
darkness  to  seek  that  which  is  lost  until  He  find 
it.  For  even  that  is  not  shut  out  beyond  the 
bounds  of  possibility  in  the  impenetrable  mys- 


Heaven  217 

tery  of  the  Hereafter.  Do  you  know  "WTiittier's 
beautiful  poem  of  the  old  monk  who  had  spent 
his  whole  life  in  hard  and  menial  work  for  the 
rescue  and  help  of  others  ?  And  when  he  is 
dying  his  confessor  tells  him  work  is  over, 
"  Thou  shalt  sit  down  and  have  endless  prayers, 
and  wear  a  golden  crown  for  ever  and  ever  in 
Heaven."  "  Ah,"  he  says,  "  I'm  a  stupid  old 
man.  I'm  dull  at  prayers.  I  can't  keep  awake, 
but  I  love  my  fellow  men.  I  could  be  good  to 
the  worst  of  them.  I  could  not  bear  to  sit 
amongst  the  lazy  saints  and  turn  a  deaf  ear  to 
the  sore  complaints  of  those  that  suffer.  I 
don't  want  your  idle  Heaven.  I  want  still  to 
work  for  others."  The  confessor  in  anger  left 
him,  and  in  the  night  came  the  voice  of  his 
Lord- 

"  Tender  and  most  compassionate.     Never  fear, 
For  Heaven  is  love,  as  God  Himself  is  love ; 
Thy  work  below  shall  be  thy  work  above."  l 

Be  sure  that  the  repose  of  Heaven  will  be  no 
idling  in  flowery  meadows  or  sitting  for  ever  in 
a  big  temple  at  worship,  as  the  poor,  weary 

1  Whittier,  "  The  Brother  of  Mercy." 


218  The  Far  Hereafter 

little  children  are  sometimes  told  after  a  long 
sermon  in  church.  No,  "  there  is  no  temple  in 
Heaven,"  we  are  told — no  Church.  Because  all 
life  is  such  a  glad  serving  and  rejoicing  in  God 
that  men  need  no  special  tunes  and  places  for 
doing  it. 

IY.    SHALL  WE  KNOW  ONE  ANOTHER  IN 
HEAVEN  ? 

"What  else  can  we  learn  ?  Shall  we  know 
one  another?  Does  any  one  really  doubt  it 
who  believes  in  God  at  all?  What  sort  of 
Heaven  would  it  be  otherwise?  What  sort 
of  comfort  would  there  be  if  we  did  not 
know  one  another?  Oh,  this  beggarly  faith, 
that  God  has  to  put  up  with,  that  treats  the 
Father  above  as  it  would  treat  a  man  of 
doubtful  character.  "I  must  have  His  defi 
nite  texts.  I  must  have  His  written  pledges, 
else  I  will  not  believe  any  good  thing  in  His 
dealing."  That  is  our  way.  We  talk  very 
piously  about  our  belief  in  God's  love,  but  we 
are  afraid  to  infer  anything,  to  argue  anything 
from  the  infinitude  of  that  love.  No,  we  must 
have  God's  bond  signed  and  sealed.  I  do  be 
lieve  that  one  reason  why  we  have  not  more  of 


Heaven  219 

direct  answers  about  the  mysteries  of  the  future 
life  is  because  God  thought  that  no  such  an 
swer  should  be  necessary — that  His  love,  if  one 
would  only  believe  in  it,  is  a  sufficient  answer 
to  them  all. 

There  is  less  need  of  discussing  the  subject 
here,  since  we  have  already  dealt  with  the 
question  of  Recognition  in  the  Intermediate  Life 
(Part  I,  Chapter  VII).  If  even  in  that  imperfect 
state  "  absent  from  the  body  "  we  saw  reason 
to  hope  for  recognition,  think  how  that  hope 
rises  to  certainty  in  the  great  perfect  life  of 
Heaven  where  "I"  shall  be  again  "in  the 
body  "  the  glorious  perfect  spiritual  body. 

As  I  have  pointed  out  the  Bible  gives  only 
passing  hints  on  the  subject.  But  it  comforts 
the  mourners  with  the  thought  of  meeting 
those  whom  Christ  will  bring  with  Him.  What 
would  be  the  good  of  meeting  if  they  should 
not  know  them  ?  St.  Paul  expects  to  meet  his 
converts  and  present  them  before  Christ.  How 
could  he  do  so  if  he  did  not  know  them  ?  Our 
Lord  depicts  Dives  and  Lazarus  even  in  the 
lower  Hades  life  as  knowing  each  other.  He 
says  to  the  dying  thief  as  they  went  within  the 
veil,  "  To-day  shalt  thou  be  with  Me."  What 


220  The  Far  Hereafter 

could  it  mean  except  they  should  know  each 
other  within  ? 

But  surely  the  Bible  does  not  need  to  say  it. 
It  is  one  of  those  things  that  we  may  assume 
with  certainty.  We  know  that  Heaven  would 
scarce  be  Heaven  at  all  if  we  were  to  be  but 
solitary  isolated  spirits  amongst  a  crowd  of 
others  whom  we  did  not  know  or  love.  We 
Joiow  that  the  next  world  and  this  world  come 
from  the  same  God  who  is  the  same  always. 
We  know  that  in  this  world  He  has  bound  us 
up  in  groups,  knowing  and  loving  and  sympa 
thizing  with  each  other.  Unless  His  method 
utterly  changes  He  must  do  the  same  hereafter. 
And  we  have  seen  what  a  prophecy  of  recogni 
tion  lies  deep  in  the  very  fibres  of  that  nature 
which  God  has  implanted  in  us.  If  we  shall 
not  know  one  another,  why  is  there  this  undy 
ing  memory  of  departed  ones,  the  aching  void 
that  is  never  filled  on  earth  ?  The  lower  ani 
mals  lose  their  young  and  in  a  few  days  forget 
them.  But  the  poor,  human  mother  never  for 
gets.  When  her  head  is  bowed  with  age,  when 
she  has  forgotten  nearly  all  else  on  earth,  you 
can  bring  the  tears  into  her  eyes  by  mention 
ing  the  child  that  died  in  her  arms  forty  years 


Heaven  221 

ago.  Did  God  implant  that  divine  love  in  her 
only  to  disappoint  it  ?  God  forbid !  A  thou 
sand  times,  no.  In  that  world  the  mother  shall 
meet  her  child,  and  the  lonely  widow  shall 
meet  her  husband,  and  they  shall  learn  fully 
the  love  of  God  in  that  rapturous  meeting  with 
Christ's  benediction  resting  on  them. 

I  know  there  are  further  questions  rising  in 
our  hearts.  Will  our  dear  ones  remember 
us  ?  Will  they,  in  all  the  years  of  progress, 
have  grown  too  good  and  great  for  fellowship 
with  us?  There  is  no  specific  answer  save 
what  we  can  infer  from  the  boundless  goodness 
and  kindness  of  God.  Since  He  does  not  for 
get  us  we  may  be  sure  they  will  not  forget  us. 
Since  His  superior  greatness  and  holiness  does 
not  put  Him  beyond  our  reach,  we  may  be  sure 
that  theirs  will  not — their  growth  will  be 
mainly  a  growth  of  love  which  will  only  bring 
them  closer  to  us  for  ever  and  ever. 

Y.    How  DO  MEN  ENTER  HEAVEN? 

We  have  asked,  What  is  meant  by  Heaven  ? 

What  can  be  known  of  the  details  of  life  in 

Heaven  ?    And  now  I  close  this  book  with  the 

solemn  question  for  us  all :  How  shall  we  enter 


222  The  Far  Hereafter 

Heaven  ?  If  you  have  followed  me  thus  far 
the  answer  is  easy.  Though  there  is  a  special 
place  which  shall  be  Heaven,  yet,  if  Heaven 
means  a  state  of  mind  rather  than  a  place  of 
residence,  if  Heaven  means  to  be  something 
rather  than  to  go  somewhere,  though  it  means 
to  go  somewhere,  too,  then  the  answer  is  easy. 
We  enter  Heaven  by  a  spiritual,  not  by  a  nat 
ural  act.  We  begin  Heaven  here  on  earth, 
not  by  taking  a  journey  to  the  sun  or  the 
planets,  not  by  taking  a  journey  from  this 
world  up  through  the  air,  but  by  taking  a  jour 
ney  from  a  bad  state  of  mind  to  a  good  state 
of  mind ;  from  that  state  of  mind  which  is  en 
mity  against  God,  to  that  of  humble,  loyal, 
loving  obedience  to  Christ.  It  is  not  so  much 
that  we  have  to  go  to  Heaven.  We  have  to  do 
that,  too.  But  Heaven  has  to  come  to  us  first. 
Heaven  has  to  begin  in  ourselves.  "The  be 
ginning  of  Heaven  is  not  at  that  hour  when 
the  eye  grows  dim  and  the  sound  of  friendly 
voices  becomes  silent  in  death,  but  at  that  hour 
when  God  draws  near  and  the  eyes  of  the  spir 
itual  understanding  are  opened,  and  the  soul 
sees  how  beautiful  Christ  is,  how  hateful  sin 
is;  the  hour  when  self-will  is  crucified,  and 


Heaven  223 

the  God- will  is  born  in  the  resolutions  of  a  new 
heart."  Then  Heaven  has  begun,  the  Heaven 
that  will  continue  after  our  death. 

Do  we  believe  that  this  is  the  right  way  to 
think  of  Heaven  ?  For  if  so  it  is  a  serious 
question  for  us  all.  What  about  my  hopes  of 
entering  Heaven  ?  If  Heaven  consists  of  char 
acter  rather  than  possessions,  of  a  state  of  mind 
rather  than  a  place  of  residence,  if,  in  fine, 
Heaven  has  to  begin  on  earth,  what  of  our 
hopes  of  entering  Heaven  ?  Is  it  not  pitiful  to 
hear  people  talk  lightly  about  going  to  Heaven, 
whose  lives  on  earth  have  not  any  trace  of  the 
love  and  purity  and  nobleness  and  self-sacrifice 
of  which  Heaven  shall  entirely  consist  here 
after?  To  see  men  with  the  carnal  notions 
about  Heaven  as  a  place  of  external  glory  and 
beauty  and  jasper  and  emerald,  where,  after 
they  have  misused  their  time  on  earth,  they 
shall  fly  away  like  swallows  to  an  eternal  sum 
mer.  Why,  what  should  they  do  in  Heaven  ? 
They  would  be  miserable  there  even  if  they 
could  get  there.  They  would  be  entirely 
out  of  their  element,  like  a  fish  sent  to  live  on 
the  grass  of  a  lovely  meadow.  Those  who 
shall  enjoy  the  Heaven  hereafter  are  they 


224  I*16  Far  Hereafter 

whose  Heaven  has  begun  before.  They  who 
may  hope  to  do  the  work  of  God  hereafter  are 
those  who  are  humbly  trying  to  do  that  will 
on  earth.  These  shall  inherit  the  everlasting 
Kingdom.  Unto  which  blessed  Kingdom  may 
He  vouchsafe  to  bring  us  all !  Amen. 


48197